Mercedes - C 200 - Owners Manual - 2013 - 2013

£9.99

Get your hands on the complete Mercedes factory workshop software

Download now

Check out our popular Mercedes 200 Manuals below:

Mercedes - E Class - Wiring Diagram - 2003 - 2003

Mercedes - CLK 320 - Parts Catalogue - 1998 - 2002

Mercedes - 216 - Workshop Manual - 2006 - 2006

Mercedes - E 550 - Workshop Manual - 2003 - 2009

See All

Mercedes - E Class - Wiring Diagram - 2003 - 2003

Mercedes - CLK 320 - Parts Catalogue - 1998 - 2002

Mercedes - 216 - Workshop Manual - 2006 - 2006

Mercedes - E 550 - Workshop Manual - 2003 - 2009

See All

Get your hands on the Complete Mercedes Factory Workshop Software

Download now

9.99

Summary of Content

C-Class É2045847382+ËÍ 2045847382 Order no. 6515 0768 13 Part no. 204 584 73 82 Edition A 2013 C-Class Operator's Manual Operator's Manual Symbols Registered trademarks: i Practical tips or further information that RBluetooth® X is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc. RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG. RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of Prince. RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Harman International Industries. RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius XM radio Inc. RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation. RGracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC. In this Operator's Manual, you will find the following symbols: could be helpful to you. This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed. Several of these symbols in X succession indicate an instruction with several steps. (Y page) This symbol tells you where you can find more information about a topic. This symbol indicates a warning or YY an instruction that is continued on the next page. Display This font indicates a display in the multifunction display/COMAND display. Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Editorial office Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without the written permission of Daimler AG. Parts of the software in the vehicle are protected by copyright © 2005 The FreeType Project http://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved. G WARNING Warning notes draw your attention to hazards that endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal. ! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. As at 28.11.2011 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may differ according to: Rmodel Rorder Rcountry variant Ravailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features Therefore, descriptions may vary from those of your own vehicle. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROperator's Manual Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep printed copies of the documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass the documents on to the new owner. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company RMaintenance 2045847382 É2045847382+ËÍ Contents Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 27 Introduction ......................................... 21 Safety ................................................... 37 Opening/closing ................................. 73 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 93 Lights and windshield wipers .......... 109 Climate control ................................. 125 Driving and parking .......................... 139 On-board computer and displays .... 199 Stowage and features ...................... 259 Maintenance and care ...................... 285 Breakdown assistance ..................... 299 Wheels and tires ............................... 317 Technical data ................................... 349 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 115 V socket ...................................... 269 12 V socket see Sockets 4ETS see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) .................................................. 181 4MATIC off-road system ................... 181 A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 219 Function/notes ................................ 62 Important safety notes .................... 62 Warning lamp ................................. 247 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 130 Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 210 Display message ............................ 234 Function/information .................... 193 Active Driving Assistance package . 193 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 210 Display message ............................ 233 Function/information .................... 196 Active light function ......................... 114 Active Service System see ASSYST PLUS ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 67 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Display message ............................ 229 Function/notes ............................. 114 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ...................................... 212 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 356 Air bags Display message ............................ 225 Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 42 Important safety notes .................... 41 Knee bag .......................................... 43 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp .................................. 45 Pelvis air bag ................................... 44 Safety guidelines ............................. 40 Side impact air bag .......................... 43 Window curtain air bag .................... 45 Air-conditioning system see Climate control Air vents Glove box ....................................... 136 Important safety notes .................. 135 Rear ............................................... 137 Setting ........................................... 135 Setting the center air vents ........... 136 Setting the side air vents ............... 136 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 215 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-theft alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Ashtray ............................................... 268 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .......................................... 209 ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 286 Hiding a service message .............. 286 Notes ............................................. 286 Resetting the service interval display ........................................... 286 Service message ............................ 286 Special service requirements ......... 287 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 70 Function ........................................... 70 Switching off the alarm .................... 70 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 210 Display message ............................ 232 Function/notes ............................. 188 Audio menu (on-board computer) .......................................... 206 Audio system see separate operating instructions Authorized Centers see Qualified specialist workshop Index Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshops see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ see Lights Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... Automatic headlamp mode .............. Automatic transmission Automatic drive program ............... Changing gear ............................... Display message ............................ Driving tips .................................... Emergency running mode .............. Kickdown ....................................... Manual drive program .................... Problem (malfunction) ................... Program selector button ................ Pulling away ................................... Releasing the parking lock manually ........................................ Selector lever ................................ Shift ranges ................................... Starting the engine ........................ Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... Transmission position display ........ Transmission positions .................. Automatic transmission emergency mode ............................... 229 146 145 111 151 150 241 150 155 150 153 155 150 143 155 148 152 143 151 149 149 155 B Backup lamp Changing bulbs .............................. 120 Display message ............................ 228 Bag hook ............................................ 264 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 63 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) .................................................... 63 Battery (SmartKey) Checking .......................................... 77 Important safety notes .................... 77 Replacing ......................................... 77 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 308 Display message ............................ 231 Important safety notes .................. 306 Jump starting ................................. 310 Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 210 Display message ............................ 234 Notes/function .............................. 189 see Active Blind Spot Assist Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message ............................ 221 Notes ............................................. 356 Brake fluid level ................................ 291 Brake lamps Changing bulbs .............................. 120 Display message ............................ 227 Brakes ABS .................................................. 62 BAS .................................................. 63 BAS PLUS ........................................ 63 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 356 Display message ............................ 219 Driving tips .................................... 162 High-performance brake system .... 164 Important safety notes .................. 162 Maintenance .................................. 163 Parking brake ................................ 159 Warning lamp ................................. 247 Breakdown see Flat tire see Towing away/tow-starting Bulbs see Changing bulbs C California Important notice for retail customers and lessees .................... 22 Calling up a malfunction see Display messages Car see Vehicle 5 6 Index Care Carpets .......................................... 297 Car wash ........................................ 292 Display ........................................... 296 Exterior lights ................................ 295 Gear or selector lever .................... 296 Interior ........................................... 296 Matte finish ................................... 293 Notes ............................................. 291 Paint .............................................. 293 Plastic trim .................................... 296 Power washer ................................ 292 Rear view camera .......................... 295 Roof lining ...................................... 297 Seat belt ........................................ 297 Seat cover ..................................... 297 Sensors ......................................... 295 Steering wheel ............................... 296 Tail pipes ....................................... 295 Trim pieces .................................... 296 Washing by hand ........................... 292 Wheels ........................................... 293 Windows ........................................ 294 Wiper blades .................................. 294 Wooden trim .................................. 296 Cargo tie down rings ......................... 264 Car wash (care) ................................. 292 CD player/CD changer (on-board computer) .......................................... 207 Center console Lower section .................................. 33 Upper section .................................. 32 Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 213 Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 75 Changing bulbs Brake lamps ................................... 120 Cornering light function ................. 119 High-beam headlamps ................... 118 Important safety notes .................. 117 Low-beam headlamps .................... 118 Overview of bulb types .................. 117 Parking lamps ................................ 119 Reversing lamps ............................ 120 Standing lamps (front) ................... 119 Child-proof locks Important safety notes .................... 61 Rear doors ....................................... 61 Children In the vehicle ................................... 56 Restraint systems ............................ 56 Child seat LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ............................................ 59 Special seat belt retractor ............... 59 Top Tether ....................................... 60 Cigarette lighter ................................ 268 Cleaning Mirror turn signal ........................... 295 Climate control Automatic climate control (3zone) .............................................. 129 Controlling automatically ............... 131 Cooling with air dehumidification . . 130 Defrosting the windows ................. 134 Defrosting the windshield .............. 133 Dual-zone automatic climate control ........................................... 127 Important safety notes .................. 126 Indicator lamp ................................ 131 Information on using 3-zone automatic climate control .............. 130 Maximum cooling .......................... 134 Notes on using automatic climate control ........................................... 128 Overview of systems ...................... 126 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 131 Problem with the rear window defroster ........................................ 134 Rear control panel ......................... 129 Setting the air distribution ............. 132 Setting the airflow ......................... 133 Setting the air vents ...................... 135 Setting the climate mode ............... 131 Setting the temperature ................ 132 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 134 Switching on/off ........................... 130 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 135 Index Switching the rear window defroster on/off ............................ 134 Switching the ZONE function on/ off .................................................. 133 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 28 see Instrument cluster COMAND see separate operating instructions Combination switch .......................... 112 Compass Calibrating ..................................... 282 Calling up ....................................... 282 Setting ........................................... 282 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 204 Convenience closing feature .............. 87 Convenience opening feature ............ 87 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 290 Display message ............................ 230 Filling capacity ............................... 357 Important safety notes .................. 356 Temperature (on-board computer) . 215 Temperature gauge ........................ 201 Warning lamp ................................. 254 Cooling see Climate control Cornering light function Changing bulbs .............................. 119 Display message ............................ 226 Function/notes ............................. 114 Crash-responsive emergency lighting ............................................... 117 Cruise control Cruise control lever ....................... 166 Deactivating ................................... 167 Display message ............................ 237 Driving system ............................... 165 Function/notes ............................. 165 Important safety notes .................. 165 Setting a speed .............................. 167 Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 166 Cup holder Center console .............................. 266 Important safety notes .................. 265 Rear compartment ......................... 266 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 25 Customer Relations Department ....... 25 D Dashboard see Instrument cluster Dashboard lighting see Instrument cluster lighting Data see Technical data Daytime running lamps Display message ............................ 228 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ...................................... 212 Switching on/off (switch) .............. 111 Dealerships see Qualified specialist workshop Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting (on-board computer) ...................................... 212 Interior lighting .............................. 213 Diagnostics connection ...................... 24 Digital speedometer ......................... 205 Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 296 Display message ASSYST PLUS ................................ 286 Display messages Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 218 Driving systems ............................. 232 Engine ............................................ 230 General notes ................................ 218 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 218 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 243 Lights ............................................. 226 Safety systems .............................. 219 SmartKey ....................................... 243 Tires ............................................... 238 Vehicle ........................................... 241 Distance display (on-board computer) .......................................... 209 Distance recorder ............................. 204 see Trip odometer Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 256 DISTRONIC PLUS Deactivating ................................... 175 Display message ............................ 235 7 8 Index Displays in the multifunction display ........................................... 174 Driving tips .................................... 176 Function/notes ............................. 167 Important safety notes .................. 167 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 173 Warning lamp ................................. 256 Doors Automatic locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 213 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 82 Central locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ....................................... 75 Control panel ................................... 35 Display message ............................ 242 Emergency locking ........................... 82 Emergency unlocking ....................... 82 Important safety notes .................... 80 Opening (from inside) ...................... 81 Drinking and driving ......................... 161 Drinks holder see Cup holder Drive program Automatic ...................................... 151 Display ........................................... 149 Manual ........................................... 153 SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 215 Drive program selector ..................... 151 Driver's door see Doors Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 287 Symmetrical low beam .................. 110 Driving lamps see Daytime running lamps Driving on flooded roads .................. 164 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 62 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 67 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 63 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) ............................................... 63 Electronic brake force distribution ... 67 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) .......................................... 64 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ........................................... 65 Important safety information ........... 62 Overview .......................................... 62 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 68 Driving systems Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 193 Active Driving Assistance package ......................................... 193 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 196 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 188 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 189 Cruise control ................................ 165 Display message ............................ 232 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 167 Dynamic handling package with sports mode .................................. 177 HOLD function ............................... 178 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 191 Lane Tracking package .................. 189 Parking Guidance ........................... 184 PARKTRONIC ................................. 181 RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 179 Rear view camera .......................... 187 Driving tips Automatic transmission ................. 150 Brakes ........................................... 162 Break-in period .............................. 140 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 176 Downhill gradient ........................... 162 Drinking and driving ....................... 161 Driving abroad ............................... 110 Driving in winter ............................. 165 Driving on flooded roads ................ 164 Driving on wet roads ...................... 164 Exhaust check ............................... 161 Fuel ................................................ 160 General .......................................... 160 Hydroplaning ................................. 164 Icy road surfaces ........................... 165 Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ................................... 163 Snow chains .................................. 321 Symmetrical low beam .................. 110 Wet road surface ........................... 163 Drowsiness detection assistance system see ATTENTION ASSIST Index DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 207 DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 207 Dynamic handling package with sports mode ....................................... 177 E EASY-ENTRY feature Activating/deactivating ................. 214 Function/notes ............................. 102 EASY-EXIT feature Crash-responsive ........................... 103 Function/notes ............................. 102 Switching on/off ........................... 214 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 220 Function/notes ................................ 67 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 161 On-board computer ....................... 204 ECO start/stop function Deactivating/activating ................. 145 General information ....................... 144 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Electronic Traction System see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 82 Fuel filler flap ................................. 157 Trunk ............................................... 85 Vehicle ............................................. 82 Emergency spare wheel Storage location ............................ 301 Emergency Tensioning Devices Function ........................................... 56 Safety guidelines ............................. 40 Emissions control Service and warranty information .... 22 Engine Check Engine warning lamp ........... 253 Display message ............................ 230 ECO start/stop function ................ 144 Engine number ............................... 352 Irregular running ............................ 147 Jump-starting ................................. 310 Starting problems .......................... 147 Starting the engine with the SmartKey ....................................... 143 Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 143 Switching off .................................. 159 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 314 Engine electronics Problem (malfunction) ................... 147 Engine oil Adding ........................................... 289 Additives ........................................ 356 Checking the oil level ..................... 288 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 289 Display message ............................ 231 Filling capacity ............................... 355 Notes about oil grades ................... 355 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 288 Temperature (on-board computer) . 215 Viscosity ........................................ 356 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 215 Deactivating/activating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 66 Deactivating/activating (except AMG vehicles) ................................ 209 Deactivating/activating (notes; except AMG vehicles) ...................... 65 Display message ............................ 219 ETS/4ETS ........................................ 65 Function/notes ................................ 64 Important safety information ........... 64 Warning lamp ................................. 249 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ................................................ 65 Exhaust check ................................... 161 Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instructions) ...................................... 295 Exterior lighting Setting options .............................. 110 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 103 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 105 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 104 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 104 9 10 Index Folding in when locking (on-board computer) ...................................... Out of position (troubleshooting) ... Setting ........................................... Storing settings (memory function) ........................................ Storing the parking position .......... Eyeglasses compartment ................. 214 105 104 106 105 261 F Filler cap see Fuel filler flap First-aid kit ......................................... 300 Flat tire Changing a wheel/mounting the spare wheel ................................... 302 MOExtended run-flat system ......... 301 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 301 Raising the vehicle ......................... 303 Floormat ............................................. 283 Fog lamps Switching on/off ........................... 112 Front fog lamps Display message ............................ 227 Switching on/off ........................... 112 Fuel Additives ........................................ 354 Consumption statistics .................. 204 Displaying the current consumption .................................. 204 Displaying the range ...................... 204 Driving tips .................................... 160 Flexible fuel vehicles ...................... 354 Fuel gauge ....................................... 29 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 353 Important safety notes .................. 352 Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 353 Problem (malfunction) ................... 158 Refueling ........................................ 156 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 353 Fuel filler flap Emergency release ........................ 157 Opening/closing ............................ 156 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 204 Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ Problem (malfunction) ................... Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool kit) ...................................................... Fuses Allocation chart ............................. Before changing ............................. Dashboard fuse box ....................... Fuse box in the engine compartment ................................. Fuse box in the trunk ..................... Important safety notes .................. 353 158 300 314 314 314 315 315 314 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ..................... Important safety notes .................. Opening/closing the garage door .. Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... Gear indicator (on-board computer) .......................................... Gear or selector lever (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... Glove box ........................................... 281 278 281 279 215 296 350 261 H Handbrake see Parking brake Hazard warning lamps ...................... 113 Headlamps Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 290 Cleaning system (capacity) ............ 358 Cleaning system (function) ............ 113 Cleaning system (notes) ................ 357 Fogging up ..................................... 115 see Automatic headlamp mode Head restraints Adjusting ......................................... 97 Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 98 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 97 Adjusting (rear) ................................ 98 Index Installing/removing (rear) ................ 99 Luxury .............................................. 98 see NECK-PRO head restraints see NECK-PRO head restraints/ NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Heating see Climate control High-beam headlamps Changing bulbs .............................. 118 Display message ............................ 227 Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off ................................. 114 Switching on/off ........................... 113 Hill start assist .................................. 144 HOLD function Display message ............................ 233 Function/notes ............................. 178 Hood Closing ........................................... 288 Display message ............................ 242 Opening ......................................... 287 Hydroplaning ..................................... 164 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 70 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 29 Settings ......................................... 211 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 30 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 200 Interior lighting ................................. 116 Automatic control .......................... 116 Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) ...................................... 213 Emergency lighting ........................ 117 Manual control ............................... 116 Overview ........................................ 116 Reading lamp ................................. 116 J Jack Storage location ............................ 300 Using ............................................. 303 Jump-start (engine) see Jump starting (engine) Jump starting (engine) ...................... 310 K KEYLESS-GO Convenience closing feature ............ 88 Display message ............................ 243 Locking ............................................ 75 Start/Stop button .......................... 142 Starting the engine ........................ 143 Unlocking ......................................... 75 Key positions KEYLESS-GO .................................. 142 SmartKey ....................................... 141 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 150 Manual drive program .................... 154 Knee bag .............................................. 43 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane detection (automatic) see Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 210 Display message ............................ 233 Function/information .................... 191 Lane Tracking package ..................... 189 Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 215 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ................................................ 59 Light function, active Display message ............................ 228 Lights Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off . 213 Active light function ....................... 114 Automatic headlamp mode ............ 111 Cornering light function ................. 114 Display message ............................ 226 11 12 Index Driving abroad ............................... 110 Fog lamps ...................................... 112 Hazard warning lamps ................... 113 High beam flasher .......................... 113 High-beam headlamps ................... 113 Light switch ................................... 110 Low-beam headlamps .................... 111 Parking lamps ................................ 112 Rear fog lamp ................................ 112 Standing lamps .............................. 112 Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off ................................. 212 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board computer) ...................................... 212 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (switch) .................... 111 Switching the exterior lighting delayed switch-off on/off (onboard computer) ............................ 212 Switching the surround lighting on/off (on-board computer) .......... 212 Turn signals ................................... 112 see Changing bulbs see Interior lighting Light sensor (display message) ....... 229 Loading guidelines ............................ 260 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 82 Emergency locking ........................... 82 From inside (central locking button) ............................................. 81 Locking centrally see Central locking Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 213 Low-beam headlamps Changing bulbs .............................. 118 Display message ............................ 226 Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) ................................. 110 Switching on/off ........................... 111 Lumbar support Adjusting ......................................... 99 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ............................................ 99 Luxury head restraints ....................... 98 M M+S tires ............................................ 320 Malfunction message see Display messages Matte finish (cleaning instructions) ...................................... 293 mbrace Call priority .................................... 274 Display message ............................ 221 Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... 275 Downloading routes ....................... 277 Emergency call .............................. 272 Geo fencing ................................... 278 Important safety notes .................. 270 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 276 MB info call button ........................ 274 Remote vehicle locking .................. 276 Roadside Assistance button .......... 273 Search & Send ............................... 275 Self-test ......................................... 271 Speed alert .................................... 278 System .......................................... 271 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 278 Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis ....................................... 276 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 275 Mechanical key Function/notes ................................ 76 Locking vehicle ................................ 82 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 82 Memory card (audio) ......................... 207 Memory function ............................... 106 Message memory (on-board computer) .......................................... 218 Messages see Display messages Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) Mobile phone Menu (on-board computer) ............ 207 Modifying the programming (SmartKey) ........................................... 76 Index MOExtended run-flat system ........... 301 MP3 Operation ....................................... 207 see separate operating instructions Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 203 Permanent display ......................... 212 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer . 201 Overview .......................................... 31 N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) ............ 205 see separate operating instructions NECK-PRO head restraints Operation ......................................... 50 Resetting after being triggered ........ 51 NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Operation ......................................... 50 Resetting after being triggered ........ 51 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ................................................ 140 O Occupant Classification System (OCS) Faults ............................................... 49 Operation ......................................... 45 System self-test ............................... 48 Occupant safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 56 System overview .............................. 38 OCS Faults ............................................... 49 Operation ......................................... 45 System self-test ............................... 48 Odometer ........................................... 204 see Trip odometer Oil see Engine oil On-board computer AMG menu ..................................... 215 Assistance menu ........................... 209 Audio menu ................................... 206 Convenience submenu .................. 214 Displaying a service message ........ 286 Display messages .......................... 218 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 174 Factory settings submenu ............. 215 Important safety notes .................. 200 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 211 Lighting submenu .......................... 212 Menu overview .............................. 203 Message memory .......................... 218 Navigation menu ............................ 205 Operation ....................................... 201 RACETIMER ................................... 215 Service menu ................................. 211 Settings menu ............................... 211 Standard display ............................ 204 Telephone menu ............................ 207 Trip menu ...................................... 204 Vehicle submenu ........................... 213 Video DVD operation ..................... 207 Opening and closing the side trim panels ................................................. 119 Operating safety Diagnostics connection ................... 24 Operating system see On-board computer Outside temperature display ........... 201 Overhead control panel ...................... 34 Override feature Rear side windows ........................... 61 P Paint code number ............................ 351 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 293 Panic alarm .......................................... 38 Panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel Opening/closing .............................. 90 Opening/closing the roller sunblind ........................................... 91 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92 Resetting ......................................... 91 Panorama sliding sunroof Important safety notes .................... 89 Parking ............................................... 158 Important safety notes .................. 158 Parking brake ................................ 159 13 14 Index Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 105 Rear view camera .......................... 187 see PARKTRONIC Parking aid Parking Guidance ........................... 184 see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC Parking brake Display message ............................ 220 Notes/function .............................. 159 Warning lamp ................................. 252 Parking Guidance Display message ............................ 234 Important safety notes .................. 184 Parking lamps Changing bulbs .............................. 119 Switching on/off ........................... 112 PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 183 Driving system ............................... 181 Function/notes ............................. 181 Important safety notes .................. 181 Problem (malfunction) ................... 184 Range of the sensors ..................... 181 Warning display ............................. 182 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ...................................................... 45 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 296 Power washers .................................. 292 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Display message ............................ 221 Operation ......................................... 50 PRE-SAFE® Brake Activating/deactivating ................. 210 Display message ............................ 222 Function/notes ................................ 68 Warning lamp ................................. 256 Product information ............................ 21 Program selector button .................. 150 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 21 Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 143 Q Qualified specialist workshop ........... 25 R RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 179 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 215 Radar sensor system Activating/deactivating ................. 213 Display message ............................ 233 Radio Selecting a station ......................... 206 see separate operating instructions Reading lamp ..................................... 116 Rear compartment Setting the airflow ......................... 133 Setting the air vents ...................... 137 Rear fog lamp Display message ............................ 227 Switching on/off ........................... 112 Rear seat Display message ............................ 242 Folding the backrest forwards/ back ............................................... 263 Rear view camera Cleaning instructions ..................... 295 Function/notes ............................. 187 Rear-view mirror Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 103 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 105 Rear window blind ............................ 267 Rear window defroster Problem (malfunction) ................... 134 Switching on/off ........................... 134 Refueling Fuel gauge ....................................... 29 Important safety notes .................. 156 Refueling process .......................... 156 see Fuel Releasing the parking lock manually (automatic transmission) ..................................... 155 Remote control Garage door opener ....................... 278 Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 279 Reporting safety defects .................... 25 Index Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 232 Warning lamp ................................. 253 see Fuel Residual heat (climate control) ........ 135 Restraint system see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Reverse gear Engaging (automatic transmission) ................................. 148 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 23 Roller blind see Roller sunblind Roller sunblind Panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel ..................................... 91 Rear side windows ......................... 267 Rear window .................................. 267 Roof carrier ........................................ 265 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... 297 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 358 Route (navigation) see Route guidance (navigation) Route guidance (navigation) ............ 205 S Safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 56 Child restraint systems .................... 56 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 45 Overview of occupant safety systems ........................................... 38 Safety system see Driving safety systems Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 54 Adjusting the height ......................... 55 Belt force limiters ............................ 56 Cleaning ......................................... 297 Correct usage .................................. 53 Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 56 Fastening ......................................... 54 Important safety guidelines ............. 52 Releasing ......................................... 55 Safety guidelines ............................. 40 Special seat belt retractor ............... 59 Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) ...................... 214 Warning lamp ................................. 245 Warning lamp (function) ................... 55 Seats Adaptive seat backrests (AMG vehicles) ........................................ 100 Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 97 Adjusting (manually and electrically) ...................................... 96 Adjusting lumbar support ................ 99 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ............................................ 99 Adjusting the head restraint ............ 97 Cleaning the cover ......................... 297 Correct driver's seat position ........... 94 Important safety notes .................... 95 Seat heating problem .................... 101 Seat ventilation problem ................ 101 Storing settings (memory function) ........................................ 106 Switching seat heating on/off ....... 100 Switching seat ventilation on/off . . 101 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 295 Service see ASSYST PLUS Service menu (on-board computer) . 211 Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 356 Coolant (engine) ............................ 356 Engine oil ....................................... 355 Fuel ................................................ 352 Important safety notes .................. 352 Washer fluid ................................... 357 Service work see ASSYST PLUS Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 215 On-board computer ....................... 211 Setting the air distribution ............... 132 Setting the airflow ............................ 133 SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 215 Side impact air bag ............................. 43 15 16 Index Side marker lamp (display message) ............................................ 228 Side windows Cleaning ......................................... 294 Convenience closing feature ............ 87 Convenience opening feature .......... 87 Important safety information ........... 86 Opening/closing .............................. 86 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89 Resetting ......................................... 88 Sliding sunroof Important safety notes .................... 89 Opening/closing .............................. 90 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92 Resetting ......................................... 90 see Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel SmartKey Changing the battery ....................... 77 Changing the programming ............. 76 Checking the battery ....................... 77 Convenience closing feature ............ 87 Convenience opening feature .......... 87 Display message ............................ 243 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 75 Important safety notes .................... 74 Loss ................................................. 79 Mechanical key ................................ 76 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 141 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 79 Starting the engine ........................ 143 Snow chains ...................................... 321 Sockets General notes ................................ 269 Rear compartment ......................... 269 Spare wheel Notes/data .................................... 345 Storage location ............................ 301 Specialist workshop ............................ 25 Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speedometer Digital ............................................ 205 In the Instrument cluster ................. 29 Segments ...................................... 201 Selecting the unit of measurement ................................ 211 see Instrument cluster SPORT handling mode Activating/deactivating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 66 Warning lamp ................................. 250 SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Display message ............................ 222 Introduction ..................................... 39 Warning lamp ................................. 252 Warning lamp (function) ................... 39 Standing lamps Changing bulbs .............................. 119 Display message ............................ 228 Switching on/off ........................... 112 Starting (engine) ................................ 143 Steering (display message) .............. 243 Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ................... 102 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 102 Button overview ............................... 31 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 201 Cleaning ......................................... 296 Important safety notes .................. 101 Paddle shifters ............................... 151 Storing settings (memory function) ........................................ 106 Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 151 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 215 Stowage areas ................................... 260 Stowage compartments Armrest (under) ............................. 261 Cup holders ................................... 265 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 261 Glove box ....................................... 261 Important safety information ......... 260 Rear ............................................... 262 Stowage net ................................... 262 Under driver's seat/frontpassenger seat .............................. 262 Stowage net ....................................... 262 Stowage well beneath the trunk floor .................................................... 264 Summer opening see Convenience opening feature Summer tires ..................................... 320 Sun visor ............................................ 266 Index Supplement Restraint System see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Surround lighting (on-board computer) .......................................... 212 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ................................................. 134 Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 70 T Tachometer ........................................ 201 Tail lamps Display message ............................ 227 Tank content Fuel gauge ....................................... 29 Technical data Capacities ...................................... 352 Information .................................... 350 Tires/wheels ................................. 343 Vehicle data ................................... 358 TELEAID Call priority .................................... 274 Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... 275 Downloading routes ....................... 277 Emergency call .............................. 272 Geo fencing ................................... 278 Important safety notes .................. 270 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 276 MB info call button ........................ 274 Remote vehicle locking .................. 276 Roadside Assistance button .......... 273 Search & Send ............................... 275 Self-test ......................................... 271 Speed alert .................................... 278 System .......................................... 271 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 278 Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis ....................................... 276 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 275 Telephone Accepting a call ............................. 208 Display message ............................ 243 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 207 Number from the phone book ........ 208 Redialing ........................................ 208 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 208 Temperature Coolant .......................................... 201 Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 215 Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 215 Outside temperature ...................... 201 Setting (climate control) ................ 132 TEMPOMAT Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 237 Theft deterrent systems ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 70 Immobilizer ...................................... 70 Through-loading feature ................... 262 Time see Separate Operator's Manual Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 215 Tire pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 326 Checking manually ........................ 325 Display message ............................ 238 Maximum ....................................... 324 Notes ............................................. 323 Pressure loss warning .................... 325 Recommended ............................... 322 Tire pressure monitoring system Function/notes ............................. 326 Restarting ...................................... 329 Warning lamp ................................. 257 Tires Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 341 Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... 339 Bar (definition) ............................... 339 Characteristics .............................. 339 Checking ........................................ 319 Definition of terms ......................... 339 Direction of rotation ...................... 342 Display message ............................ 238 Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... 341 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................... 338 DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) ............ 339 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) ..................................... 340 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) ..................................... 340 17 18 Index GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) ......................... Important safety notes .................. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ...... Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... Labeling (overview) ........................ Load bearing index (definition) ...... Load index ..................................... Load index (definition) ................... Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) ..................................... Maximum load on a tire (definition) ..................................... Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) ....................... Maximum tire load ......................... Maximum tire load (definition) ....... Optional equipment weight (definition) ..................................... PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) ..................................... Replacing ....................................... Service life ..................................... Sidewall (definition) ....................... Speed rating (definition) ................ Storing ........................................... Structure and characteristics (definition) ..................................... Temperature .................................. TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) ..................................... Tire bead (definition) ...................... Tire pressure (definition) ................ Tire pressures (recommended) ...... Tire size (data) ............................... Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating .................... Tire tread ....................................... Tire tread (definition) ..................... Total load limit (definition) ............. Traction ......................................... Traction (definition) ....................... Tread wear ..................................... Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ...................................... Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) .................... 340 318 339 340 335 341 338 340 340 340 340 333 340 341 340 342 319 341 340 342 339 335 341 341 341 339 343 336 319 341 341 334 341 334 334 339 Unladen weight (definition) ............ 340 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 341 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 339 see Flat tire Top Tether ............................................ 60 Towing Important safety guidelines ........... 311 Installing the towing eye ................ 312 Removing the towing eye ............... 313 With the rear axle raised ................ 313 Towing away With both axles on the ground ....... 313 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 314 Important safety notes .................. 311 Transfer case ..................................... 155 Transmission see Automatic transmission Transporting the vehicle .................. 313 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 296 Trip computer (on-board computer) .......................................... 204 Trip odometer Calling up ....................................... 204 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 205 Trunk Emergency release .......................... 85 Important safety notes .................... 83 Locking separately ........................... 85 Opening (automatically from inside) .............................................. 84 Opening (automatically from outside) ............................................ 84 Trunk lid Display message ............................ 242 Opening/closing .............................. 83 Opening dimensions ...................... 358 Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 358 Turn signals Display message ............................ 226 Switching on/off ........................... 112 Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate Index U Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 82 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 81 V Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 266 Vehicle Data acquisition ............................... 26 Display message ............................ 241 Emergency unlocking ....................... 82 Equipment ....................................... 22 Individual settings .......................... 211 Limited Warranty ............................. 26 Loading .......................................... 329 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 82 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 75 Lowering ........................................ 305 Maintenance .................................... 23 Parking for a long period ................ 160 Pulling away ................................... 143 Raising ........................................... 303 Reporting problems ......................... 25 Towing away .................................. 311 Transporting .................................. 313 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 82 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 75 Vehicle data ................................... 358 Vehicle data ....................................... 358 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 358 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 82 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 351 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 300 Video (DVD) ........................................ 207 VIN ...................................................... 351 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ Brakes ........................................... Check Engine ................................. Coolant .......................................... Distance warning ........................... 247 247 253 254 256 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 256 ESP® .............................................. 249 ESP® OFF ....................................... 250 Fuel tank ........................................ 253 Overview .......................................... 30 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp .................................. 45 Reserve fuel ................................... 253 Seat belt ........................................ 245 SPORT handling mode ................... 250 SRS ................................................ 252 Tire pressure monitor .................... 257 Warranty ............................................ 350 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 243 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 305 Wheel chock ...................................... 303 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 302 Checking ........................................ 319 Cleaning ......................................... 293 Important safety notes .................. 318 Interchanging/changing ................ 342 Mounting a new wheel ................... 305 Removing a wheel .......................... 305 Storing ........................................... 342 Tightening torque ........................... 305 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 343 Window curtain air bag Display message ............................ 223 Operation ......................................... 45 Windows see Side windows Windshield Defrosting ...................................... 133 Windshield washer fluid see Windshield washer system Windshield washer system .............. 290 Filling capacity ............................... 358 Notes ............................................. 357 Windshield wipers Problem (malfunction) ................... 122 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 122 Switching on/off ........................... 121 19 20 Index Winter driving Important safety notes .................. Slippery road surfaces ................... Snow chains .................................. Winter tires M+S tires ....................................... Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... Important safety notes .................. Replacing (windshield) ................... Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) ...................................... Workshops see Qualified specialist workshop 320 165 321 320 294 122 122 296 Introduction Protection of the environment General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of integrated environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear depend on the following factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel consumption. Ralways make sure that the tire pressures are correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration. Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. Environmental concerns and recommendations Wherever the operating instructions require you to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-use them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment. Product information Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversion parts and accessories that have been approved for your vehicle. Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts as well as conversion parts and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Therefore, Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This is also the case, even if they have been independently or officially approved. The use of non-approved parts could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, approved conversion parts and accessories are available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Here, you will receive advice about permissible technical modifications, and the parts will be professionally installed. starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Z 21 22 Introduction Operator's Manual Service and vehicle operation General notes Service and literature Before you first drive off, read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Vehicle equipment This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from some of the descriptions or illustrations. The original purchase agreement lists all systems installed in your vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if you have any questions about equipment or operation. The Operator's Manual and the Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty Systems Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws) REmission Information for customers in California In California, you have the right to exchange a vehicle or receive a refund of the purchase or leasing price if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or an authorized workshop or maintenance facility cannot, after several authorized repairs, rectify considerable damage to or malfunctions of the vehicle that are covered by the contractual warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the serious defect or damage can result in deadly or serious injury to the vehicle occupants while driving AND this defect has already been repaired at least twice AND Mercedes-Benz, LLC has been Introduction informed in writing of the necessity of a repair. (2) the defect or damage, though less serious than (1) above, has already been repaired at least four times AND Mercedes-Benz has been informed in writing of the necessity of a repair. (3) the vehicle cannot be used for longer than 30 calendar days because of repair work resulting from this or other serious defects or damage. Please send your written notice to: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Maintenance The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals. Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in your vehicle literature portfolio. Change of address or change of ownership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: Rservice facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses. In the USA Z 23 24 Introduction Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning. Because the vehicle's electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for repairs or modifications to electronic components. Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle. Some safety systems only function when the engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving. G WARNING Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires/wheels may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. Such blows can be caused, for example, by running over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole. If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred: Rturn on your hazard warning flashers. down carefully. Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road. Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/ wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs. Rslow Declarations of conformity Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." Diagnostics connection G WARNING If you connect equipment to the on-board diagnostics connection, it can affect the Introduction operation of the vehicle systems. This can impair the operating safety of your vehicle while driving. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to the onboard diagnostics connection. G WARNING Loose equipment or equipment cables which are connected to the on-board diagnostics connection can obstruct the area around the pedals. The equipment or the cables could come between the pedals in the event of sudden braking or acceleration. This may affect the function of the pedals. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any equipment or cables in the driver's footwell. ! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can, for example, lead to emissions monitoring information being reset. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Rwork relevant to safety and maintenance work Rservice Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifications Rwork on electronic components Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one of the following addresses. In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Reporting safety defects USA only: The following text is reproduced as required of all manufacturers according to Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it Z 25 26 Introduction may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can obtain additional information about vehicle safety from: http://www.safercar.gov Limited Warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. Data stored in the vehicle Information about electronic data acquisition in the vehicle (Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951) Your vehicle records electronic data. If your vehicle is equipped with mbrace (Canada: TELE AID), data is transmitted in the event of an accident. This information helps, for example, to test vehicle systems after an accident and to continually improve vehicle safety. Daimler AG can access this data and submit it: Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner Ron the instruction of prosecuting authorities Rfor use in arbitration of disputes that involve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its sales and service organizations Ras otherwise required or permitted by law. Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELE AID) purchase agreement to find out more about data that can be recorded and transmitted by this system. Cockpit ................................................. Instrument cluster .............................. Multifunction steering wheel ............. Center console .................................... Overhead control panel ...................... Door control panel .............................. 28 29 31 32 34 35 At a glance 27 28 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Steering wheel paddle shifters 151 ; Combination switch 112 = Instrument cluster 29 ? Horn A PARKTRONIC warning display (Canada only) B Function Page E Adjusting the steering wheel manually 101 F Adjusting the steering wheel electrically 101 G Cruise control lever 166 H Parking brake 159 181 I Diagnostics connection Overhead control panel 34 J Opening the hood 287 C Climate control systems 126 K Releasing the parking brake 159 D Ignition lock Start/Stop button 141 142 L Light switch 110 24 Instrument cluster 29 Instrument cluster Function At a glance Displays and controls Page : Fuel gauge ; Coolant temperature 201 = Speedometer with segments 201 Function Page ? Multifunction display 203 A Tachometer 201 B Instrument lighting 200 30 Instrument cluster At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Function : Page ÷ ESP® M SPORT handling mode in AMG vehicles 249 ; · Distance warning 256 = å ESP® OFF 249 ? $ Brakes (USA only) 247 A J Brakes (Canada only) 247 B #! Turn signals 112 C ! ABS 247 D 6 SRS 252 E ; Check Engine 253 F h Tire pressure monitor 257 250 Function Page G ü Seat belt 245 H ÷ ESP® in AMG vehicles 250 I ? Coolant 254 J K High-beam headlamps 113 L Low-beam headlamps 111 L T Parking lamps 112 M R Rear fog lamp 112 N N Front fog lamps 112 O 8 Reserve fuel 253 K Multifunction steering wheel 31 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Audio/COMAND display; see the separate operating instructions = ? Switches on the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions ? ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits phone book/redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume 8 Mute Page 203 Function A B 207 =; Selects a menu 9: Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists a Confirms your selection Hides display messages % Back Switches off the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions Page 201 201 201 218 201 32 Center console At a glance Center console Center console, upper section Function : Page Audio system/COMAND; see the separate operating instructions ; c Seat heating 100 = s Seat ventilation 101 ? c PARKTRONIC (Canada only) 181 £ Hazard warning lamps 113 A Function B 45 Indicator lamp C u Roller sunblind in the rear window D M Dynamic driving package with sports mode å AMG vehicles: ESP® Page 45 267 177 66 Center console 33 At a glance Center console, lower section Function Page E Stowage compartment Ashtray Cigarette lighter 260 268 268 F Selector lever 148 G Cup holders 265 H Stowage compartment 260 Function I Audio/COMAND controller; see the separate operating instructions J Ú Selects the drive program Page 150 Overhead control panel 34 At a glance Overhead control panel Function : ; = ? A B 1 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off Page 116 | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off 116 p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 116 3 Opens/closes the sliding sunroof 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel with roller sunblinds Function C Rear-view mirror 103 D Buttons for the garage door opener 281 E Integrated electronic compass 282 F Microphone for mbrace (emergency call system), telephone and the Voice Control System1 G F Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace system) 273 p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off 116 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 116 90 90 ï MB Info call button (mbrace system) 274 G SOS button (mbrace system) 272 Page H I The Voice Control System is only available in combination with COMAND. Observe the additional operating instructions. Door control panel 35 At a glance Door control panel Function Page Function : Opens the door 81 B ; %& Unlocks/locks the vehicle 81 C = Adjusts the seats electrically 97 ? r45= Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel 106 7Zö\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 103 A D Page W Opens/closes the side windows 86 n Activates/ deactivates the override feature for the side windows in the rear compartment 61 o Opens the trunk lid 84 36 Useful information .............................. Panic alarm .......................................... Occupant safety .................................. Children in the vehicle ........................ Driving safety systems ....................... Theft deterrent locking system ......... 38 38 38 56 62 70 Safety 37 Occupant safety 38 Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all Safety models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Panic alarm To activate: press ! button : for approximately one second. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. X To deactivate: press ! button : again. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehicle. 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The Product label with FCC ID and IC certification number can be found in the battery case of the SmartKey. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-Gen of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The Product label with FCC ID and IC certification number can be found in the battery case of the SmartKey. X i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Occupant safety Overview of occupant safety In this section, you will learn the most important facts about the restraint system components of the vehicle. The restraint system consists of: Rseat belts restraint systems RLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors Rchild Occupant safety RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System) head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Rair bag system components with: - PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp - front-passenger seat with Occupant Classification System (OCS) The different air bag systems work independently of each other. The protective functions of the system work in conjunction with each other. Not all air bags are always deployed in an accident. RNECK-PRO G WARNING Modifications to or work improperly conducted on restraint system components or their wiring, as well as tampering with interconnected electronic systems, can lead to the restraint systems no longer functioning as intended. Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs), for example, could deploy inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents although the deceleration threshold for air bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the restraint systems. Do not tamper with electronic components or their software. i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle restraint systems for infants and children, see "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 56). SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Introduction SRS consists of: RThe 6 SRS warning lamp bags RAir bag control unit (with crash sensors) REmergency Tensioning Devices RBelt force limiters RAir SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming into contact with the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. It can also reduce the effect of the forces to which occupants are subjected during an accident. SRS warning lamp SRS functions are checked regularly when you switch on the ignition and when the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started. The SRS components are in operational readiness when the 6 SRS warning lamp goes out while the engine is running. G WARNING The SRS self-check has detected a malfunction if the 6 SRS indicator lamp: Rdoes not light up at all not go out after approximately four seconds after the engine is started Rcomes on after the engine was started or while driving. For your safety, Mercedes-Benz strongly recommends that you have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. SRS may otherwise fail to activate when it is needed in the event of an accident, which could lead to serious or fatal injuries. SRS might also be activated unexpectedly and unnecessarily, which could also result in injury. In addition, work carried out improperly on SRS may render SRS inoperative or cause unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS system should only be carried out by qualified specialist personnel. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Rdoes Z Safety Additional protection is provided by: 39 40 Occupant safety Safety for details. USA only: for further information contact our Customer Assistance center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). Safety guidelines for seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) and air bags G WARNING RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced. Their anchoring points must also be checked. Only use seat belts installed or supplied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. Check your national disposal guidelines. California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ Perchlorate/index.cfm. RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD that has deployed must be replaced. RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They could tear. RDo not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the seat belts. RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. RNo modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS. RDo not change or remove any component or part of the SRS. RDo not install additional trim material, seat covers, badges, etc. over the steering wheel hub, front-passenger front air bag cover, outer sides of the seat backrests, door trim panels, or door frame trims. RDo not install additional electrical/ electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring. RKeep area between air bags and occupants free of objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.). RDo not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door. These items may be thrown around in the vehicle and cause head and other injuries when the window curtain air bag is deployed. RAir bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them. RNever place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat. RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RFor your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the air bag unit or ETD, our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RGiven the considerable deployment speed, required inflation volume, and the material of the air bags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other, potentially more serious injuries resulting from air bag deployment. If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz strongly recommends that you inform the subsequent owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the applicable section in the Operator's Manual. Air bags Important safety notes G WARNING Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence of injuries and fatalities in certain situations: Rfrontal impacts (driver's and frontpassenger front air bags and driver's knee bag) Rside impacts (side impact air bags, window curtain air bags and pelvis air bags) However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. When the air bags are deployed, a small amount of powder is released. The powder generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. In order to prevent potential breathing difficulties, you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door. G WARNING In order to reduce the potential danger of injuries caused during the deployment of the front air bags, the driver and front passenger must always be correctly seated and wear their seat belts. For maximum protection in the event of a collision, you must always be in the normal seat position with your back against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure that it is correctly positioned on your body. As the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating position and correct positioning of the hands on the steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag. Occupants who are not wearing their seat belt, are not seated properly or are too close to the air bag can be seriously injured or killed by an air bag, as it inflates with great force instantaneously: Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the backrest. Rmove the driver's seat as far back as possible, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver's chest to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 inches (25 cm). You should be able to accomplish this by adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If you have any difficulties, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Rdo not lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard. Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag inflates. Radjust the front-passenger seat as far back as possible from the dashboard when the seat is occupied. Roccupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the side impact air bag inflates. This could result in serious or fatal injuries should the side impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants. Z 41 Safety Occupant safety 42 Occupant safety Safety If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator's Manual. G WARNING Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in a rear seat. A side impact air bag related injury may occur if occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side impact air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job. To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow these guidelines: (1) (2) belts regardless of whether your vehicle is equipped with air bags or not. It is important for your safety and that of your passengers to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. Front air bags The front air bags increase protection for the driver's and front-passenger's head and chest. Always sit as upright as possible and use the seat belts properly. Make sure that children 12 years old and under use an appropriately sized child restraint, infant restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. Always wear seat belts properly. The air bags are only deployed if the air bag control unit detects the need for deployment. Only in the event of such a situation, will the air bags provide their supplemental protection. If the driver and front passenger do not wear their seat belts, it is not possible for the air bags to provide their supplemental protection. In the event of other types of impacts and impacts below air bag deployment thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The driver and passengers will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible protection if the vehicle rolls over. Air bags provide additional protection; they are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front air bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove box. They are deployed: Rin the event of certain frontal impacts the system determines that air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rif the seat belt is fastened Rindependently of other air bags in the vehicle Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air bags. In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit evaluates the vehicle deceleration. In the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed if a second Rif deployment threshold is exceeded within a few milliseconds. The deployment of the front-passenger front air bag is also influenced by the weight category of the front passenger, which is determined by the Occupant Classification System (OCS) (Y page 45). The lighter the passenger-side occupant, the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required (predicted at the start of the impact) for second stage inflation of the front-passenger front air bag. In the second stage, the front air bags are inflated with the maximum amount of propellant gas available. The front air bags are not deployed in situations where a low impact severity is predicted. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt. The front-passenger front air bag will only be deployed if: Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied. Rthe 45 indicator lamp on the center console is not lit (Y page 45). Rthe air bag control unit predicts a highimpact severity. Driver's knee bag Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering column. If, during a frontal collision, the system determines that air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, driver's knee bag : is deployed along with the driver's air bag. Driver's knee bag : operates best in conjunction with correctly positioned and fastened seat belts. Side impact air bags G WARNING The pressure sensors for side impact air bag control are located in the doors. Do not modify any components of the doors or door trim panels including, for example, the addition of door speakers. Improper repair work on the doors or the modification or addition of components to the doors create a risk of rendering the side impact air bags inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the doors must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. G WARNING Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using seat covers or other seat coverings can cause a malfunction of the side impact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability. When deployed, the side impact air bags offer additional protection for the thorax of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. However, they do not protect the: Driver's knee bag : increases the driver's protection against: Rknee injuries Rthigh injuries Rlower leg injuries Rhead Rneck Rarms Z 43 Safety Occupant safety Occupant safety G WARNING Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using seat covers or other seat coverings can cause a malfunction of the side impact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability. Safety 44 Front side impact air bags : and rear side impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer seat cushions. The side impact air bags are deployed: the side on which an impact occurs the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of the use of the seat belt Rindependently of the front air bags Rindependently of the ETDs Side impact air bags will not deploy in side impacts which do not exceed the system's preset deployment thresholds for lateral acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt. The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side is not deployed in the following situations: Pelvis air bag deployment enhances the level of protection of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. Ron Rat ROCS has detected that the front-passenger seat is unoccupied. front-passenger seat belt is not fastened. The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side will deploy if the frontpassenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not. Rthe Pelvis air bags : deploy next to and below the outer seat cushions. They are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of the use of the seat belt Rindependently of the front air bags Rindependently of the ETDs Pelvis air bags : will not deploy in side impacts which do not exceed the system's preset deployment thresholds for lateral acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt. The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side is not deployed in the following situations: Pelvis air bags ROCS has detected that the front-passenger pelvis air bags are not available for AMG vehicles. Rthe seat is unoccupied. front-passenger seat belt is not fastened. Occupant safety Window curtain air bags The window curtain air bags enhance the level of protection for the head, but not chest or arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The window curtain air bags are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deploy in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. Occupant Classification System (OCS) How the Occupant Classification System works The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the frontpassenger seat by means of a weight sensor. The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated automatically for certain weight categories. The 45 indicator lamp shows you the current status. If the 45 indicator lamp lights up, the frontpassenger air bag is disabled. The system does not deactivate: Rthe side impact air bag pelvis air bag Rthe window curtain air bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: Rthe Rwith Window curtain air bags : are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rregardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Rindependently of seat belt use Rindependently of the front air bags Window curtain air bags : will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system's preset deployment thresholds for lateral acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt. Rat the seat belt fastened correctly a position that is as upright as possible with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet on the floor If the front-passenger's weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning on armrests), OCS may not be able to approximate the occupant's weight category. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Both the driver and the front passenger should always observe the 45 indicator lamp to determine whether or not the front passenger is positioned correctly. Rin G WARNING If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger than a small Z Safety The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of whether the frontpassenger seat is occupied or not. 45 Safety 46 Occupant safety individual is in the front passenger seat, have the front passenger reposition himself or herself in the seat until the 45 indicator lamp goes out. In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit will not allow front passenger front air bag deployment when the OCS has classified the front passenger seat occupant as weighing as much as or less than a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or if the front passenger seat is classified as being empty. When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint, the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated. This indicates that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat is classified as being empty, the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated. This indicates that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being heavier than the weight of a typical 12month-old child seated in a standard child restraint or as being a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small adult), the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started. Depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the seat, it will then remain illuminated or go out. With the 45 indicator lamp illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. With the 45 indicator lamp out, the front passenger front air bag is activated. When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as an adult or someone larger than a small individual, the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately six seconds when the engine is started and then go out. This indicates that the front passenger front air bag is activated. If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is deactivated and will not be deployed. If the 45 indicator lamp is not illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is activated and will be deployed Rin the event of certain frontal impacts the impact exceeds a predetermined triggering threshold Rindependent of the side impact air bag or pelvis air bag If the front passenger front air bag is deployed, the rate of inflation will be influenced by Rif Rthe rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit front passenger's weight category as identified by the OCS Rthe For further information, see "Air bag display messages" (Y page 225). G WARNING According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat belt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchors and Top Tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Occupants, especially children, should always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat Occupant safety RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to deactivate the front-passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front-passenger seat. RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to eliminate this risk completely is never to place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the frontpassenger seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint on the rear seat. RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat, make sure the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Should the 45 indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the 45 indicator lamp while driving to make sure that the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the 45 indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates. RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat: - move the seat as far back as possible - use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child - secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions RFor children larger than the typical 12month-old child, the front-passenger front air bag may or may not be activated. If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy. The OCS may have detected that the seat: Ris either empty or occupied by a person with a weight up to that of a typical twelvemonth-old child seated in a standard child restraint Ris occupied by a small individual, such as a young teenager or a small adult Ris occupied by a child in a child restraint system, whose weight is greater than that of a typical twelve-month-old child. These are examples of when the OCS deactivates the front-passenger front air bag. Deactivation takes place although the collision fulfills the criteria for deploying the driver's air bag. If the SmartKey has been removed from the ignition lock or is in position 0, the Z Safety recommended for the size and weight of the child. Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat: 47 48 Occupant safety 45 indicator lamp : does not light up. Safety G WARNING If the red 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the 45 indicator lamp light up simultaneously, the OCS is malfunctioning. The front passenger front air bag will be deactivated in this case. Have the system checked by qualified technicians as soon as possible. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. In order to ensure proper operation of the air bag system and OCS: RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the seat backrest. RWhen seated, a passenger should not position him/herself in such a way as to cause the passenger's weight to be lifted from the seat cushion as this may result in the OCS being unable to correctly approximate the passenger's weight category. RRead and observe all warnings in this chapter. System self-test The 45 indicator lamp lights up if you: Rturn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock Ron vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button once or twice When an adult is sitting correctly on the frontpassenger seat and is categorized by the OCS system as an adult, the 45 indicator lamp lights up and goes off again after approximately six seconds. If the passenger seat is not occupied and the OCS system detects this, the 45 indicator lamp remains lit and does not go off. G WARNING If the 4 5 indicator lamp does not illuminate, the system is not functioning. You must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any child on the front passenger seat. For further information, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 49). G WARNING Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the OCS. The underside and rear side child restraint system must be placed entirely on the seat cushion and the backrest of the front-passenger seat backrest. If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger seat backrest. An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident, instead of increasing protection for the child. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation of child restraint systems. Occupant safety 49 Problems with the Occupant Classification System Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The 45 The OCS is malfunctioning. indicator lamp lights up X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized and stays on. Mercedes-Benz Center. The person on the X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction front-passenger seat: display (Y page 225). Rhas the weight of a typical adult Rhas been determined by the system not to be a child G WARNING If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do not allow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The 45 The OCS is malfunctioning. indicator lamp does not X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the light up and/or does child seat. not stay on. X Check the installation of the child restraint system. The front-passenger X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto seat is: the seat. Runoccupied X If the 45 indicator lamp remains off, have the OCS Roccupied with a system checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedesweight up to that of a Benz Center. Do not transport a child on the front-passenger typical twelveseat as long as the OCS is not functioning. month-old child in a X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction standard child display (Y page 225). restraint system G WARNING If the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger seat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired. Z Safety Problem 50 Occupant safety PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant protection) Safety G WARNING The PRE-SAFE® system reduces the impact of an accident on vehicle occupants, as long as their seat belts have been fastened correctly. Although your vehicle is equipped with a PRESAFE® system, the possibility of injury in the event of an accident cannot be ruled out. You should therefore always drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions. PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures to protect occupants in certain hazardous situations. PRE-SAFE® intervenes: BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS Rif, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: If the seat belts are not released: X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but only when the vehicle is stationary. The belt pretensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you adjust the seat. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when resetting the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. More information about seat belt adjustment, a convenience function integrated into PRESAFE®, can be found in the "Seat belt adjustment" section (Y page 54). Rif Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. vehicles with memory function for the front-passenger seat: the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable position. Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof/ panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the side windows are closed so that only a small gap remains. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt pretensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. Ron NECK-PRO head restraints/NECKPRO luxury head restraints (except AMG vehicles) NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints increase protection of the driver's and front-passenger's head and neck. In the event of a rear collision of a certain severity, the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats are moved forwards and upwards. This provides better head support. G WARNING Do not attach any objects (e.g. a coat hanger) to the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints. Otherwise, the NECKPRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints may not function properly and in the event of a rear-end collision may not offer the protection they are designed to provide. G WARNING Seat or head restraint covers can cause a malfunction when the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK PRO luxury head restraints are activated or when the side impact air bags Occupant safety restraint cushion and the cover. Failure to observe this could result in injuries. NECK-PRO head restraints i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints have been triggered in an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats (Y page 51). Otherwise, the additional protection will not be available in the event of another rear-end collision. NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints that have been triggered are moved forwards and can no longer be adjusted. G WARNING For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Important safety notes Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion forwards in the direction of arrow :. X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion down in the direction of arrow ; as far as it will go. X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion back in the direction of arrow = until the cushion engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO head restraint. X G WARNING NECK-PRO luxury head restraints For reasons of safety, have the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center after a rear-end collision. i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK- PRO luxury head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized MercedesBenz Center. G WARNING When pushing back the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion, make sure your fingers do not become caught between the head Z Safety or pelvis air bags are deployed, or they can prevent this completely. The NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK PRO luxury head restraints or side impact air bags/pelvis air bags can therefore not provide the intended protection. Do not use any seat or head restraint covers. 51 Occupant safety Safety 52 Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle document wallet. X Slide resetting tool : into guide ; between the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint and the rear cover of the head restraint. X Push resetting tool : downwards until you hear the head restraint deployment mechanism engage. X Pull out resetting tool :. X Firmly press the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint cushion back = until it engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO luxury head restraint. X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle document wallet. X Seat belts Important safety notes The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. Even where this is not the case, all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fastened when the vehicle is in motion. i See "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 56) for further information on infants and children traveling in the vehicle as well as on child restraint systems. G WARNING Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure all of your passengers are properly restrained. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts. Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt. The air bags can only protect as intended if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts. G WARNING Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a position that is as upright as possible and the seat belt is properly positioned on the body. G WARNING Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Make sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. G WARNING Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Do not make any modifications to the seat belts. This can lead to unintended activation of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when necessary. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Correct use of the seat belts G WARNING USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY RSeat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in the event of an accident. REach occupant should wear their seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes SRS (driver front air bag, driver's side knee bag, front-passenger front air bag, side impact air bags, pelvis air bags, window curtain air bags for the side windows), Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt force limiters, and front seat knee bolsters. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front air bags, driver's side knee bag, and ETDs) and side (side impact air bags, pelvis air bags, window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds. RNever wear the shoulder belt under your arm, across your neck or off your shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The seat belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen. Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder section is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder. It should not touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder portion of the seat belt under your arm. RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the lap belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash. RNever wear seat belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these might cause injuries. RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly. Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing. RNever use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects at the same time. RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the seat belt to distribute impact forces. The twisted seat belt against your body could cause injuries. RPregnant women should also always use a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen. RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is as upright as possible. RCheck your seat belt during travel to make sure it is properly positioned. RNever place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always Z 53 Safety Occupant safety Safety 54 Occupant safety keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat. RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant restraints, toddler restraints, or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions. G WARNING Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They could tear. Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. This could damage the seat belt. Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the seat belts. Fastening seat belts G WARNING According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seat whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized child restraint system or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see the "Children in the vehicle" section. A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Adjust the seat and move the backrest to an almost vertical position (Y page 94). X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt sash guide :. X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder section of the seat belt across the middle of your shoulder and the lap section across your pelvis. X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =. X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height (Y page 55). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. X All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. For further information on special seat belt retractors, see (Y page 59). For more information about releasing the seat belt with release button ?, see "Releasing seat belts" (Y page 55). Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt buckle and you then turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More information about PRE-SAFE® can be found in the "PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection system)" section (Y page 50). Belt height adjustment You can adjust the seat belt height on the driver's seat and the front-passenger seat. Adjust the height so that the upper part of the seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards. The belt sash guide engages in various positions. X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide release :. X Slide the belt sash guide downwards. X Release belt sash guide release : and make sure that the belt sash guide has engaged. Releasing seat belts X Press release button ?(Y page 54) and guide belt tongue ; back towards belt sash guide :. ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Belt warning for the driver and front passenger Regardless of whether the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts have already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. It then goes out if the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. The warning tone goes out after approximately six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fastened. If after six seconds the driver or front passenger have not fastened their seat belts and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up: Runtil the driver's or front passenger's seat belt is fastened Rif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is exceeded, a warning tone also sounds with increasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds or until the driver or frontpassenger seat belt has been fastened. If the driver/front passenger unfasten their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and a warning tone sounds again. The warning tone ceases after 60 seconds if driver or front-passenger seat belt has still not been fastened. The 7 seat belt warning lamp stops flashing but remains illuminated. After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the warning tone is reactivated and the 7 seat up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue Z 55 Safety Occupant safety 56 Children in the vehicle Safety belt warning lamp flashes again if the vehicle speed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h). The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goes out if: Rboth the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts. or Rthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open. i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belts" (Y page 245). Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt force limiters The front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear are equipped with belt tensioners and belt force limiters. The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident, pulling them close against the body. The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back towards the backrest. When triggered, seat belt force limiters help to reduce the peak force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronized with the front air bags. These take on a part of the deceleration force. They take on a part of the deceleration force, resulting in the force exerted on the occupant being distributed over a greater area. The ETDs can only be activated when: Rthe ignition is switched on. restraint systems are operational; see "SRS warning lamp" (Y page 39). Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on each of the lap-shoulder belts in the front. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied and the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on the front-passenger side Rthe The ETDs on the outside seats in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. The belt tensioners are triggered depending on the type and severity of an accident, if: Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end collision, the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of the impact Rin the event of a side impact, the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direction on the side opposite the impact If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. G WARNING Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must be replaced. For your safety, when disposing of the pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety instructions. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the frontpassenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency Tensioning Device could be triggered in the event of an accident. Children in the vehicle Child restraint systems Important safety notes We recommend that all infants and children be properly secured in an infant or child restraint system at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. Infants and children must always be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system recommended for the size and weight of the child. The infant or child restraint system must be properly secured in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All infant or child restraint systems must comply with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2. An information label on the child restraint system indicates whether it meets these standards. This information is also provided in the installation instructions supplied with the child restraint system. Always read and follow the manufacturer's instructions when using an infant or child restraint system or booster seat. Observe all warning signs in the vehicle interior and on the infant or child restraint. G WARNING According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Occupants, especially children, should always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat: RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to deactivate the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat. RFor children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front passenger front air bag may or may not be activated. Always make sure the 4 5 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. RIf you must install a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do so, make sure the 4 5 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. Should the 4 5 indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the 4 5 indicator lamp while driving to make sure the 4 5 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the 4 5 indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the Z 57 Safety Children in the vehicle Children in the vehicle Safety 58 front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates. RIf you have to place a child in a forwardfacing child restraint on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions. G WARNING Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt. A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Children that are too large for a child restraint must travel in seats using normal seat belts. Position the shoulder belt across the chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap-shoulder belt fits properly without a booster. When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident. If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle: X Secure the infant or child with an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the child's age and weight. X Make sure that the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion. G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. The children could: Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with vehicle equipment that can be operated even if the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, such as seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment, or the memory function If children open a door, they could injure other persons or get out of the vehicle and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and the child could be burned on these parts. Rbe G WARNING Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment or trunk unless they are firmly secured in place. Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child's risk of injury in the event of Rstrong braking maneuvers changes of direction Ran accident Rsudden Special seat belt retractor All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt will not slacken once the child restraint system has been secured. Installing a child restraint system: Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt retractor. X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle. X Activating the special seat belt retractor: Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seat belt retractor retract it again. While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is activated. X Push down on the child restraint system to take up any slack. X Removing a child restraint system/ deactivating the special seat belt retractor: Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Press the seat belt release button and guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated. X A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster. Install the child restraint system in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Attach the child restraint system to both securing rings. An incorrectly installed child restraint system could come loose during an accident and seriously or even fatally injure the child. Child restraint systems or child seat securing rings that are malfunctioning or damaged as the result of a collision must be replaced. ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. Securing rings for two LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed on the left and right of the rear seats. Secure non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems using the vehicle's seat belt system. When installing child restraint systems, you must observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. ! When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the middle seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could otherwise be damaged. G WARNING Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors in the rear G WARNING Children that are too large for a child restraint must travel in seats using normal seat belts. Position shoulder belt across the chest and shoulder, not face or neck. Vehicles without rear-seat through-loading facility Installation instructions : indicate the installation location of securing rings =. Z 59 Safety Children in the vehicle Children in the vehicle 60 Pull protective caps ; off securing rings = by pulling in the direction of the arrow. Safety X Vehicles with rear-seat through-loading facility X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions when installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system. Top Tether G WARNING Always lock the rear seat backrests in their upright position when the rear seats are occupied by passengers. Lock the rear seat backrests in their upright position before installing the Top Tether straps or when the cargo compartment is not in use. Make sure that rear seat backrests are secured properly by pushing and pulling on the seat backrests. If the seat backrest is not locked properly, the seat backrest could fold forward. The child restraint system is no longer supported properly or held in position and can no longer fulfill its function. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. Top Tether provides an additional connection between a child restraint system, secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount, and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. The Top Tether anchorage points are located in the rear compartment behind the head restraints. Move head restraint : upwards. Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Route Top Tether belt A under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars. X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether anchorage =. X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not twisted. X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Move head restraint : back down again slightly if necessary (Y page 98). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt A. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Make sure that Top Tether belt A is tight. X X Children in the vehicle Child-proof locks Important safety notes 61 vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. The children could: Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with vehicle equipment that can be operated even if the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, such as seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment, or the memory function If children open a door, they could injure other persons or get out of the vehicle and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and the child could be burned on these parts. Rbe Safety G WARNING To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow :. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ;. X Override feature for the rear side windows G WARNING When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats, activate the override switch. Otherwise, the children could be injured, e.g. by trapping themselves in the rear side window. Child-proof locks for the rear doors G WARNING Children could open a rear door from inside the vehicle. This could result in serious injuries or an accident. Therefore, when children ride in the rear always secure the rear doors with the child-proof locks. You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the X To activate/deactivate: press button ;. If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp : is off, Z 62 Driving safety systems Safety operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment. Driving safety systems Driving safety systems overview In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Brake Assist System) RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) RADAPTIVE BRAKE RPRE-SAFE® Brake RBAS Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or become distracted, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. i The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths, etc. (Y page 318). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 247) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 219). ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph (8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even if you only brake gently. The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. Braking If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. X If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and Driving safety systems functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. 63 To prevent a front-end collision, BAS PLUS calculates the brake force necessary if: Ryou i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. X Keep the brake pedal depressed firmly until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles equipped with DISTRONIC PLUS. BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds greater than 4 mph (7 km/h) and uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. At speeds up to 40 mph (70 km/h), BAS PLUS may also detect stationary obstacles, for example, stopped or parked vehicles. BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes function as usual, if: Ryou release the brake pedal. is no longer any danger of a rear-end collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be: Rthere Rbe switched on (Y page 213) page 233) If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS. Roperational (Y G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Z Safety BAS (Brake Assist System) approach an obstacle, and PLUS has detected a risk of collision At a speed greater than 20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the brake pressure to a value adapted to the traffic situation. At a speed less than 20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake, BAS PLUS is activated. Braking is performed as late as possible. If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. RBAS 64 Driving safety systems In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is: Safety Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line relative to the center of your vehicle G WARNING BAS PLUS does not react: people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use the device in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Rto Rto Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, altering or tampering with the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use the device in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles without 4MATIC: switch the ignition off when: Rthe parking brake is being tested using a dynamometer vehicle is being towed with the front axle raised Application of the brakes by ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake system. Rthe ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off the ignition when the parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer. Application of the brakes by ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake system. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. Before you operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified workshop. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system. ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 249) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 219). If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. If necessary, the engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. If ESP® intervenes: ESP® Do not deactivate under any circumstances. X only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X i Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. On vehicles with 4MATIC, more drive torque is also transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active if you deactivate ESP®. Deactivating/activating ESP® (except AMG vehicles) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. X To deactivate:(Y page 209) . The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To activate:(Y page 209). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Rin Traction control is part of ESP®. Z 65 Safety Driving safety systems Driving safety systems 66 If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. Safety Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action, which provides better grip. Rtraction control is still activated. RESP® still provides support when you brake. Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG vehicles) Activating/deactivating SPORT handling mode G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following. X To deactivate: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. It may be best to activate SPORT handling mode in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree. When SPORT handling mode is activated: Rin RESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree. Rthe engine's torque is restricted only to a limited degree and the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action, which provides better grip. Rtraction control is still activated. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. Deactivating/activating ESP® G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X To activate: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display. SPORT handling mode is designed for driving on designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired. Driving in SPORT handling mode requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver who is able to cope with these critical driving conditions. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. X X To deactivate: press button : until the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The ÷OFF OFF message appears in the multifunction display. Deactivate ESP® when driving on designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired. Driving without ESP® requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver who is able to cope with these critical driving conditions. To activate: briefly press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ON ON message appears in the multifunction display. ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action, which provides better grip. Rtraction control is still activated. RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). G WARNING If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 247) as well as display messages (Y page 220). EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 178) and hill start assist (Y page 144). For further information, see "Driving tips" (Y page 162). the drive wheels are able to spin. The Z 67 Safety Driving safety systems 68 Driving safety systems PRE-SAFE® Brake i Observe the "Important safety notes" Safety section (Y page 62). PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRESAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you if you very quickly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. From a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, PRE-SAFE® Brake can brake the vehicle automatically at speeds up to approximately 124 mph (200 km/h). Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated driving conditions may cause unnecessary warnings or the unnecessary intervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake. You can prevent the intervention of the PRESAFE® Brake at any time by: Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further kickdown Rreleasing the brake pedal. Ractivating The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended automatically if: Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle. is no longer any danger of a rear-end collision. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle. With the help of the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. At speeds up to approximately 40 mph (70 km/h), PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect stationary obstacles such as stopped or parked vehicles. If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE® Brake detects a risk of a collision, the system will alert you both visually and acoustically. If you do not brake or take evasive action, the system will warn you by automatically braking the vehicle gently. If there is an increased risk of collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated (Y page 50). If the risk of collision remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an accident that can no longer be avoided. Rthere G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you also brake. Automatic emergency braking cannot prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is: Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line relative to the center of your vehicle G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Rto PRE-SAFE® As a result, Brake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the onboard computer (Y page 210). When PRE-SAFE® Brake is activated, the Ä symbol appears in the multifunction display, as long as the HOLD function is deactivated (Y page 178). On vehicles with Parking Guidance, the Ä symbol is displayed when position P is engaged or you are driving faster than 22 mph (35 km/h). If PRE-SAFE® Brake is to aid you, the radar sensor system must: Rbe switched on (Y page 213) page 233) Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Roperational (Y i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, altering or tampering with the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use the device in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use the device in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Z 69 Safety Driving safety systems 70 Theft deterrent locking system Theft deterrent locking system i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency system (USA only) or the TELEAID system (Canada only) initiates a call to the Customer Assistance Center automatically. The Tele Aid system will initiate the call provided that: Safety Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The engine can be started by anyone with a valid SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle. X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid service. Rthe Tele Aid service has been activated properly. Rthe required mobile phone, power supply and GPS are available. i The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine. In the event that the engine cannot be started when the starter battery is fully charged, the immobilizer may be faulty. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ATA (anti-theft alarm system) A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Ra door vehicle with the mechanical key Rthe trunk lid Rthe hood The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example. Rthe To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately 15 seconds. X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. X X To stop the alarm using the SmartKey: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the % or & button on the SmartKey. The alarm is switched off. Theft deterrent locking system X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. Safety or X 71 Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. Z 72 73 74 74 80 83 86 89 Opening/closing Useful information .............................. SmartKey ............................................. Doors .................................................... Trunk .................................................... Side windows ...................................... Sliding sunroof .................................... 74 SmartKey Useful information Opening/closing i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). SmartKey Important safety notes G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, and do not give them access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. They could: Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts seriously or fatally injured by extreme heat or cold Rinjure themselves or have an accident with vehicle equipment that may still be in operation even after the SmartKey has been removed from the ignition, such as the seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment or memory function. If children open a door, they could cause severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if they get out of the vehicle, they could injure themselves when doing so or be seriously or even fatally injured by any passing traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very Rbe hot, and a child could be burned on these parts. G WARNUNG If a key ring is too heavy or too large, the weight acting on the SmartKey could cause it to turn in the ignition lock or catch on the steering wheel. This could cause the engine to be switched off suddenly. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large key rings to the SmartKey that is inserted in the ignition. i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The Product label with FCC ID and IC certification number can be found in the battery case of the SmartKey. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. SmartKey RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key together with: - with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey - with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil - with metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the SmartKey's functionality. Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. SmartKey functions The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors trunk lid Rthe fuel filler flap Rthe : & To lock the vehicle ; F To unlock the trunk lid = % To unlock the vehicle When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash three times. When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 212). You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 213). X To unlock centrally: press the % button. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again. Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armed again. X To lock centrally: press the & button. KEYLESS-GO General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle. Locking and unlocking centrally You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the SmartKey. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle by periodically establishing a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey. This happens: Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rwhen starting the engine Rwhile the vehicle is in motion Z Opening/closing The Product label with FCC ID and IC certification number can be found in the battery case of the SmartKey. 75 SmartKey 76 The SmartKey now functions as follows: To unlock the driver's door: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. Opening/closing X The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the frontpassenger door or the rear door. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles (Y page 75). X To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period. X Further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 88). If you pull on the handle of the trunk lid, only the trunk of the vehicle is unlocked. Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp (Y page 77) flashes twice. i If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle Mechanical key General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 70). There are several ways to turn off the alarm: X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey: press the % or & button on the SmartKey. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESSGO: press the Start/Stop button in the SmartKey or X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. G WARNING The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. Observe government disposal guidelines. California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/ index.cfm. Checking the battery Removing the mechanical key X X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ; from the SmartKey. Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. If battery check lamp : does not light up briefly during the test, the battery is discharged. i If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: SmartKey battery Rlocks Important safety notes Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Batteries contain toxic substances. Swallowing batteries can lead to serious health issues or death. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Seek medical attention immediately if a battery is swallowed. or Runlocks X the vehicle Change the battery (Y page 77). i You can get a battery at a qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 76). Z Opening/closing ignition lock. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. 77 SmartKey Opening/closing 78 Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey opening in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover : closed while doing so. X Remove battery compartment cover :. X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free from lint, grease and all other forms of contamination. X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing first and then press to close it. X Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey. X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle. X SmartKey 79 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. If this does not work: X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 77) and replace it if necessary (Y page 77). X Lock (Y page 82) or unlock (Y page 82) the vehicle using the mechanical key. The SmartKey is faulty. X Lock (Y page 82) or unlock (Y page 82) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You can no longer lock There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. or unlock the vehicle X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of using KEYLESS-GO. the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % / & button. There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % / & button. X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If this does not work: X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 77) and replace it if necessary (Y page 77). X Lock (Y page 82) or unlock (Y page 82) the vehicle using the mechanical key. Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. You have lost a SmartKey. X You have lost the mechanical key. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Z Opening/closing Problems with the SmartKey Opening/closing 80 Doors Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine cannot be started using the SmartKey. The on-board voltage is too low. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 306). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 310). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be started using the SmartKey. The steering lock is mechanically blocked. X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While doing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions. The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected as started using KEYLESS- easily. GO. The SmartKey is in X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again. the vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Doors Important safety notes G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, and do not give them access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. They could: Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts seriously or fatally injured by extreme heat or cold Rinjure themselves or have an accident with vehicle equipment that may still be in operation even after the SmartKey has Rbe been removed from the ignition, such as the seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment or memory function. If children open a door, they could cause severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if they get out of the vehicle, they could injure themselves when doing so or be seriously or even fatally injured by any passing traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and a child could be burned on these parts. G WARNING Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment or trunk unless they are firmly secured in place. Doors Rstrong braking maneuvers changes of direction Ran accident Rsudden You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. The central locking/unlocking button does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. Opening/closing Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child's risk of injury in the event of Unlocking and opening doors from the inside You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 61). Only open the door when the traffic situation permits. If the vehicle was previously locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening the vehicle from the inside will activate the antitheft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 70). X Pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. 81 X X To unlock: press button :. To lock: press button ;. If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle locks. You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 61). Only open the door when the traffic situation permits. If the vehicle was previously locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening the vehicle from the inside will activate the antitheft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 70). If the vehicle has been locked using the locking button for the central locking, or has been locked automatically, and a door is opened from the inside: Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked Ronly the door which has been opened form the inside is unlocked if only the driver's door had been previously unlocked If the vehicle has been locked centrally with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it is not unlocked when the release button for the central locking is used. Z Doors 82 Automatic locking feature Opening/closing The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the vehicle's wheels are turning at a speed in excess of 9 mph (15 km/h). You could therefore be locked out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. Rthe Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise to position 1. The door is unlocked. X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. X Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) To disarm: press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X To arm: press and hold button ; for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X i If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board computer (Y page 213). Unlocking the driver's door (mechanical key) If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 70). X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 76). X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door, the rear doors and the trunk lid. X Press the locking button (Y page 81). X Check whether the locking knobs on the front-passenger door and the rear doors are still visible. Press down the locking knobs manually, if necessary (Y page 81). X Close the driver's door. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 76). X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid are locked. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. X i If you lock the vehicle as described above, the fuel filler flap is not locked. The antitheft alarm system is not armed. been removed from the ignition, such as the seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment or memory function. If children open a door, they could cause severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if they get out of the vehicle, they could injure themselves when doing so or be seriously or even fatally injured by any passing traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and a child could be burned on these parts. G WARNING Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment or trunk unless they are firmly secured in place. Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child's risk of injury in the event of Rstrong braking maneuvers changes of direction Ran accident Rsudden Trunk Important safety notes Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You could otherwise lock yourself out. G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, and do not give them access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. They could: Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts Rbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme heat or cold Rinjure themselves or have an accident with vehicle equipment that may still be in operation even after the SmartKey has G WARNING Make sure the trunk lid is closed when the engine is running and while driving. Among other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter the vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid (Y page 358). The trunk lid can be: Ropened and closed manually from outside automatically from outside Ropened automatically from inside Rlocked separately Runlocked with the mechanical key Ropened with the emergency release button Ropened Z 83 Opening/closing Trunk Trunk 84 Opening/closing from outside Opening Opening/closing X Press the % button on the SmartKey. Opening automatically from the outside Important safety notes G WARNING Make sure the trunk lid is closed when the engine is running and while driving. Among other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter the vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. Pull handle :. X Raise the trunk lid. X Closing G WARNING To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk lid. Be especially careful when small children are around. i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid (Y page 358). Opening You can open the trunk lid automatically using the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk lid. X Press and hold the F button on the SmartKey until the trunk lid opens. or X If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lid handle and let it go again immediately. Opening automatically from the inside Pull the trunk lid down using recess :. If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the SmartKey (Y page 75) or with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 75). i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the trunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked and then opens again. X X G WARNING Make sure the trunk lid is closed when the engine is running and while driving. Among other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter the vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid (Y page 358). Trunk X To open: press the upper section of remote operating switch : for the trunk lid until the trunk lid opens. Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key) ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 70). X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 76). X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock as far as the stop. Locking the trunk separately You can lock the trunk separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains locked and cannot be opened. X Close the trunk lid. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 76). Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise from position 1 as far as it will go to position 2. The trunk is unlocked. X Turn the mechanical key back to position 1 and remove it. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. X Trunk emergency release Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock as far as the stop. X Turn the mechanical key clockwise from position 1 to position 2. X Remove the mechanical key. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. X You can open the trunk lid from inside the vehicle with the emergency release button. Z Opening/closing You can open the trunk lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. 85 Side windows Opening/closing 86 X Press emergency release button : briefly. The trunk lid unlocks and opens. The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened with the trunk lid emergency release when the vehicle is stationary or while driving. Trunk lid emergency release light: Remergency release button : flashes for 30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened Remergency release button : flashes for 60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed The trunk lid emergency release does not open the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or discharged. Side windows Important safety notes if the switch was pulled past the resistance point and released, by either pressing or pulling the respective switch. If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the windows by pressing and holding the & button on the SmartKey or by pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) on an outside door handle, the anti-entrapment feature will not operate. Activate the override switch when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the door window opening. G WARNING Do not keep any part of your body up against the window pane when opening a window. The downward motion of the pane may pull that part of your body down between the window pane and the door frame and trap it there. If there is a risk of entrapment, release the switch and pull it to close the window. Opening and closing the side windows G WARNING When opening or closing the door windows, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening/closing procedure. The door windows are equipped with automatic operation and the anti-entrapment feature. If in automatic mode a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path, the anti-entrapment feature will stop the door window and open it slightly. The door windows operate differently when the switch is pulled. See the "Problems with door windows" section for details. The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, : Front left ; Front right = Rear right ? Rear left Side windows i The side windows cannot be operated from the rear when the override feature for the side windows is activated (Y page 61). Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To open: press the corresponding switch. X To close: pull the corresponding switch. i If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by operating the switch again. X i You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine or remove the SmartKey. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are in the desired position. If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first. X Press and hold the % button again until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is in the desired position. X To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. Convenience closing General notes When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously: Rclose the side windows the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller sunblinds. Rclose G WARNING Convenience opening You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock the vehicle the side windows Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds Ropen i The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the SmartKey. The SmartKey must be close to the driver's door handle. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle. X Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the X When closing the door windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. If potential danger exists, proceed as follows: RRelease the & button to stop the closing procedure. To open, press and hold the % button. To continue the closing procedure after making sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure, press and hold the & button. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: RRelease the sensor surface on the outside door handle to stop the closing procedure. RImmediately pull on the same outside door handle and hold firmly. The door windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama roof Z Opening/closing The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. 87 Side windows 88 with power tilt/sliding panel will open for as long as the door handle is held but the door is not opened. Using the SmartKey sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. X Opening/closing i The SmartKey must be close to the driver's door handle. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle. X Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed. X On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: X X Press and hold the & button again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close. To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button. Using KEYLESS-GO The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the vehicle. All the doors must be closed. Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed. On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel close. X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. Resetting the side windows You must reset each side window if a side window can no longer be closed fully. X Close all the doors. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 86). X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 86). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. X X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the Sliding sunroof Problem: a side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. Remove the objects. X Close the side window. X Problem: a side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. G WARNING Closing the side windows with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature could lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the side windows. If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the antientrapment feature. G WARNING Pulling and holding the switch to close the door window immediately after it had been blocked two times will cause the door window to close without the anti-entrapment feature for as long as you hold the switch. Sliding sunroof Important safety notes Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel. In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof. G WARNING When opening or closing the sliding sunroof, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening/closing procedure. The sliding sunroof is equipped with automatic operation and the anti-entrapment feature. If the movement of the sliding sunroof is blocked during the closing procedure, the sliding sunroof will stop and open slightly. The sliding sunroof operates differently when the sliding sunroof switch is pressed and held. See the "Problems with the sliding sunroof" section for more details. The opening/closing procedure of the sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the sliding sunroof switch or, if the sliding sunroof switch was moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the sliding sunroof switch in any direction. G WARNING The sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly, as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment. ! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. ! The weather can change abruptly. It could start to rain or snow. Make sure that the sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be Z Opening/closing Problems with the side windows 89 Sliding sunroof 90 damaged if water enters the vehicle interior. Opening/closing i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. Operating the sliding sunroof Opening and closing i You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door. The automatic opening and raising feature is available only when the sliding sunroof is closed. The sun protection cover automatically opens along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or close the sun protection cover manually when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed. Resetting Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move smoothly. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear (Y page 90). X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another second. X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully opened and closed again (Y page 90). X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed fully after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Operating the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Overhead control panel : To raise ; To open = To close/lower Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by operating the switch again. X Overhead control panel : To raise ; To open = To close/lower Sliding sunroof Opening/closing Opening/closing The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can only be operated when the roller sunblind is open. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by operating the switch again. The automatic raising feature is available only when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. Overhead control panel : To open ; To open = To close Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by operating the switch again. X Operating the roller sunblind for the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel General notes The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can only be opened and closed together when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. G WARNING When opening or closing the roller sunblinds, make sure that no one can be injured. The roller sunblinds have automatic operation and an anti-entrapment feature. If the roller sunblinds are blocked during the closing procedure, the anti-entrapment feature stops the roller sunblinds and they open again slightly. The opening and closing of the roller sunblinds can be terminated immediately by releasing the button. In automatic operation, press the button briefly in any direction to stop the roller sunblinds. 91 Resetting the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel and the roller sunblinds if the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller sunblinds do not move smoothly. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the 3 switch to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ; and hold it until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel has opened about 4 in(10 cm). X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow = Z Opening/closing 92 Sliding sunroof until the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Press the 3 switch to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ; and hold it until the roller sunblinds have opened about 4 in(10 cm). X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow = until the roller sunblinds are fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Make sure that the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds can be fully opened and closed again (Y page 90). X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. ! If the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel and the roller sunblind cannot be fully opened or closed after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Problems with the sliding sunroof Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel. In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof. Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. G WARNING You could be severely or even fatally injured when closing the sliding sunroof with increased closing force or if the antientrapment feature is deactivated. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the sliding sunroof. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. G WARNING Pressing and holding the sliding sunroof switch to close the sliding sunroof immediately after it had been blocked two times will cause the sliding sunroof to close without the anti-entrapment feature for as long as you hold the switch. ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a qualified specialist workshop. 93 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Useful information .............................. 94 Correcting the driver's seat position ....................................................... 94 Seats .................................................... 95 Steering wheel .................................. 101 Mirrors ............................................... 103 Memory function .............................. 106 Correcting the driver's seat position 94 Useful information Seats, steering wheel and mirrors i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Correcting the driver's seat position Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported. Ryou can depress the pedals properly. X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted properly. When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint. X Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 101). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted properly. Adjusting the steering wheel manually (Y page 102) Adjusting the steering wheel electrically (Y page 102) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 95). X Make sure that seat = is adjusted properly. Manual and electrical seat adjustment (Y page 96) Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 97) When adjusting the seat, make sure that: X Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly. can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. Ryou can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly. X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 52). X Check whether you have fastened the seat belt ; properly (Y page 54). The seat belt should: Rfit snugly across your body routed across the middle of your shoulder Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions (Y page 103). X Vehicles with a memory function: save the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror Rbe Seats Seats Important safety notes G WARNING The seats can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could otherwise become trapped when adjusting the seat. G WARNING Make sure that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the central area of the head restraint. If your head is not supported correctly by the head restraint, you could suffer a severe neck injury in the event of an accident. Never drive if the head restraints are not engaged and set correctly. G WARNING In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle control, all seat, head restraint, steering wheel and rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before setting the vehicle in motion. G WARNING Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving. Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Never travel in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. This could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a position that is as upright as possible and seat belts are properly positioned on the body. G WARNING Your seat belt must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt. Observe the following points: Radjust the seat backrest until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel. Radjust the seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far back as possible with the driver still able to operate the controls properly. Radjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. Rnever place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted. Failure to do so could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. G WARNING According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seat whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized child restraint system or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see the "Children in the vehicle" section. A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. G WARNING For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors settings with the memory function (Y page 106). 95 96 Seats Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. i Further related subjects: RRear bench seat through-loading feature (Y page 262) Adjusting the seats manually and electrically ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when resetting the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. i The head restraints in the front seats are installed with the NECK-PRO system (Y page 50). For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front seats. Vehicles without the through-loading feature: the head restraints cannot be removed from the rear compartment seats. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. : Backrest angle ; Seat height = Seat cushion angle ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seat with an integrated head restraint. It is therefore not possible to set the height and angle of the head restraint. i Adjust the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are lightly supported. Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Lift handle ? and slide the seat forwards or rearwards. X Release lever ? again. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in position. X Seat cushion angle X Turn handwheel = in the desired direction. Seats 97 Adjusting the seats electrically i Vehicles without Memory function: the seats can be adjusted within three minutes of a front door being opened. The time period starts over again if, within these three minutes, you: Ropen or close a front door or remove it from the ignition lock the ignition on or off If the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock, the seats can be adjusted at any time. Rswitch Depending on the equipment, the seat adjustment buttons are either located on the side of the seat or on the door control panel. : Seat cushion angle ; Seat height = Seat fore-and-aft adjustment ? Backrest angle i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 106). i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seat featuring an integrated head restraint and the head restraint adjustment button is deactivated. It is therefore not possible to set the height and angle of the head restraint. Adjusting the head restraints Adjusting the head restraints manually : Head restraint height ; Seat cushion angle Adjusting the head restraint height2 = Seat height ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment A Backrest angle 2 For vehicles without memory function only. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Rinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock Seats 98 To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position. X Adjusting the angle of the head restraints To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull right and/or lefthand side bolster : into the desired position. X To adjust the angle of the head restraint: push or pull the head restraint in the direction of arrow ;. X Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Rear seat head restraints G WARNING For safety reasons, always drive with the rear head restraints in the upright position when the rear seats are occupied. Keep the area around head restraints clear of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the folding operation of the head restraints. X Push or pull the lower edge of the head restraint in the direction of the arrow. Adjusting the head restraints electrically X To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for head restraint adjustment (Y page 97) up or down in the direction of the arrow. Adjusting the luxury head restraints G WARNING When folding back the side cushions, never reach between the side cushion and the mounting post. You could otherwise be trapped. G WARNING For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move the respective head restraint up from the lowest non-use position and have the occupant adjust the head restraint properly. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints installed when the rear seats are occupied. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. Seats Press release catch : and pull the head restraint out of the guides. X To re-install: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position. X Fold back the rear seat backrest until it engages. X Adjusting the lumbar support Once the head restraint is fully lowered, press release catch :. X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position. You can adjust the contour of the front seats so as to provide optimum support for your back. Installing/removing the rear seat head restraints3 G WARNING Occupants should only travel sitting on seats which have the head restraints installed. This reduces the risk of injury to occupants in the event of an accident. X Move adjustment lever : in the direction of the arrow until the desired backrest contour is achieved. Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back. Release the rear seat backrest and fold it slightly forwards (Y page 263). X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop. X 3 Only for vehicles with the through-loading feature. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height 99 Seats 100 Switching the seat heating on/off Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Activating/deactivating : To raise the backrest contour ; To soften the backrest contour = To lower the backrest contour ? To harden the backrest contour G WARNING Repeatedly setting the seat heating to level 3 may result in excessive seat temperatures. The health of passengers that have limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. Therefore, do not use seat heating level 3 repeatedly. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat Adaptive backrest (AMG vehicle) heating may switch off. You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually so as to provide optimum support for your back. Driver's and front-passenger seat : To adjust the upper back support ; To adjust the contour of the backrest in the lumbar region = To adjust the lateral structure and support of the seat X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. i Repeat the adjustment if the seat no longer has the desired contour after a certain amount of time. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. Steering wheel Problems with the seat heating Problems with the seat ventilation The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. The seat ventilation has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Switching the seat ventilation on/off X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Steering wheel Activating/deactivating Important safety notes The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected. G WARNING i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or driving without the steering wheel adjustment feature locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. The electrical steering wheel adjustment feature can be operated at any time. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. X i You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (Y page 87). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X 101 Steering wheel 102 Adjusting the steering wheel manually i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 102) RStoring settings (Y page 106) EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Important safety notes : Release lever ; To adjust the steering wheel height = To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) Push release lever : down completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up completely. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction. X Adjusting the steering wheel electrically G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature. If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, stop the adjustment procedure. To halt the procedure: Rpress the steering column adjustment button. Rpress one of the memory function position buttons. The steering column stops moving immediately. Do not keep the memory function position button pressed as this will start the memory function and set the steering wheel and seat in motion. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. They could open the driver's door and thereby unintentionally activate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature and become trapped. G WARNING Let the system complete the adjustment procedure before setting the vehicle in motion. All steering wheel adjustment must be completed before setting the vehicle in motion. Driving off with the steering wheel still adjusting could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. : To adjust the steering wheel height ; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer (Y page 214). Mirrors Position of the steering wheel when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active The steering wheel swings upwards when you: 103 Mirrors Rear-view mirror Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is in position 1 Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper end stop. Position of the steering wheel for driving The steering wheel is moved to the last selected position when: Rthe driver's door is closed. insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO. When you close the driver's door with the ignition switched on, the steering wheel is also automatically moved to the previously set position. The last position of the steering wheel is stored when you switch off the ignition or when you store the setting with the memory function (Y page 106). Ryou Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened. This occurs irrespective of the position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer. X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : forwards or back. Exterior mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors G WARNING The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects are actually closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from vehicles driving behind and cause an accident, e.g. when changing lane. For this reason, make sure of the actual distance from the vehicle driving behind by glancing over your shoulder. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. The exterior mirrors are automatically heated after starting the vehicle if the rear window defroster is switched on and the outside temperature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to 10 minutes. i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors manually by switching on the rear window defroster. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Ropen Mirrors 104 Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. X i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors i If you are driving faster than Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button : for the left-hand exterior mirror or button ; for the right-hand exterior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press adjustment button = up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions. X Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically This function is only available in vehicles for Canada. 9 mph (15 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors. Setting the exterior mirrors This function is only available in vehicles for Canada. If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer (Y page 214). X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically This function is only available in vehicles for Canada. If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 214): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or frontpassenger door. i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in manually, they do not fold out. Mirrors If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors4: until you hear a click and then the mirrors engage in position. (Y page 104) The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 103). Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Setting and storing the parking position Using reverse gear You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. Automatic anti-glare mirrors G WARNING If incident light from headlamps is prevented from striking the sensor in the rear-view mirror, for instance, by luggage piled too high in the vehicle, the mirror's automatic antiglare function will not operate. Incident light could then blind you. This may distract you from the traffic conditions and, as a result, you may cause an accident. The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into antiglare mode if the following conditions are met simultaneously: Rthe ignition is switched on and light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror. The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Rincident Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position. X Using the memory button You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M ?. 4 Canada only. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Exterior mirror out of position 105 Memory function 106 Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X With the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side activated, use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the curb should be visible. X Press memory button M ? and one of the arrows on adjustment button = within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rposition of the seat, backrest and head restraint Rdriver's side: steering wheel position Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides Calling up a stored parking position setting Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side using button ;. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. X The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror on the driver's side Memory function Storing settings Adjust the seat (Y page 97). On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 102) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 103). X Briefly press the M memory button and then press storage position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X X Calling up a stored setting ! If you want to move the seat from the fully reclined position to a stored seat position, first raise the backrest. The seat could otherwise be damaged. G WARNING Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. You could otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions by the seat moving of its own accord, and as a result cause an accident. X Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. Memory function 107 i The setting procedure is interrupted as Seats, steering wheel and mirrors soon as you release the storage position button. Z 108 109 110 110 116 117 121 Lights and windshield wipers Useful information ............................ Exterior lighting ................................ Interior lighting ................................. Replacing bulbs ................................. Windshield wipers ............................ 110 Exterior lighting Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. Lights and windshield wipers i Read the information on qualified Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using the: Rlight switch Rcombination Rthe switch (Y page 112) on-board computer (Y page 212) Light switch Operation specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Exterior lighting Important safety notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. 1W Left-hand standing lamps 2X Right-hand standing lamps 3T Parking lamps, license plate and Information about driving abroad Conversion to symmetrical low beam Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low beam in countries in which traffic drives on the opposite side of the road from the country where the vehicle is registered. This prevents glare to oncoming traffic. When using symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is not lit as widely and as far ahead as normal. Have the headlamps converted at a qualified specialist workshop as close to the border as possible before driving in these countries. Conversion to asymmetrical low beam after returning Have the headlamps converted back to asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible after crossing the border again. instrument cluster lighting 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps BR Rear fog lamp CN Fog lamp (only vehicles with front fog lamps) If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to Ã. The exterior lighting (except the parking/ standing lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0. Automatic headlamp mode G WARNING If the light switch is set to Ã and it is foggy, snowing or there is poor visibility, the lowbeam headlamps will not come on automatically. This could endanger you and others. In such situations turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. Ã is the preferred light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray): RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. RWith the engine running: if you have activated the daytime running lamps function via the on-board computer, the daytime running lamps or the low-beam headlamps and parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã. Only for Canada: The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated. When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary: if you move the selector lever from a drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes. When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in high ambient light brightness: if you turn the light switch to T, you turn on the daytime running lamps and parking lamps. If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. USA only: The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the daytime running lamps function must be switched on using the on-board computer (Y page 212). If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to T or L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. i In the USA, the daytime running lamps are deactivated upon delivery from the factory. Low-beam headlamps G WARNING If the light switch is set to Ã and it is foggy, snowing or there is poor visibility, the lowbeam headlamps will not come on automatically. This could endanger you and others. In such situations turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. Even if the light sensor does not detect that is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps switch on when the SmartKey is inserted into the ignition lock and the light switch is set to the L position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog. X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Z 111 Lights and windshield wipers Exterior lighting Lights and windshield wipers 112 Exterior lighting Front fog lamps In conditions where visibility is poor due to fog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improve visibility as well as making it easier for other road users to see you. They can be operated together with the parking lamps or together with the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps. X To switch on the front fog lamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the N button. The green N indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the front fog lamps: press the N button. The green N indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Only vehicles with front fog lamps have the fog lamps function. Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of heavy fog. Please take note of the countryspecific regulations for the use of rear fog lamps. X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Parking lamps ! If the battery has been excessively discharged, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the continuous use of the T parking lamps for several hours. If possible, switch on the X right or the W left standing lamp. X To switch on: turn light switch to T. The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Standing lamps Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the standing lamps: the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in position 0. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle). Combination switch Turn signals : High-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right = High-beam flasher ? Turn signal, left Exterior lighting To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. X 113 Hazard warning lamps High-beam headlamps To switch on the high-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the Ã position, the high-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. High-beam flasher To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the engine. X Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. X The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if: Ran air bag is deployed. vehicle is slowed down rapidly from a speed of over 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a halt. X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. Rthe If the vehicle returns to a speed of over 6 mph (10 km/h) after a full application of the brakes, the hazard warning lamps are deactivated automatically. i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. Headlamp cleaning system The headlamps are cleaned automatically if the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is operated five times while the lights are on and the engine is running (Y page 121). When you switch off the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaning system is reset and counting is resumed from 0. Z Lights and windshield wipers X 114 Exterior lighting Active light function Active: Lights and windshield wipers Rif The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while driving. This allows you to recognize pedestrians, cyclists and animals. Active: when the lights are switched on. Cornering light function you are driving at speeds below 25mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel. Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel. Not active: if you are driving at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn signals or turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. The cornering light function may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Adaptive Highbeam Assist G WARNING The Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid intended to support you while driving. The driver is and remains responsible for proper vehicle lighting in accordance with the prevailing light, sight and traffic conditions. The system may be impaired or unavailable when Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, or heavy spray Rthe optical sensor area of the windshield is The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. The cornering light function can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on. dirty, fogged up, or covered by a sticker for example The system cannot recognize the following road users: RRoad users without a lighting system of their own, e.g. pedestrians RRoad users with dim lighting of their own, e.g. cyclists RRoad users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. road users behind a guardrail RIn some seldom cases, even road users with a lighting system of their own may be recognized too late or not at all. The automatic high-beam headlamps will then not be deactivated or it will be activated in spite of preceding or oncoming road users. This could endanger you and/or others and cause an accident. Always pay close attention to the traffic situation and switch off the high beam manually if necessary. You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and high beam automatically. The system recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam. The system automatically adapts the lowbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. If you drive at speeds above approximately 28 mph (45 km/h): the headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and no other road users have been detected: the high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you drive at speeds below approximately 30 mph (45 km/h) or if other road users are identified or if the roads are sufficiently illuminated: the high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster stays on. X To deactivate: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Headlamps fogged up on the inside The headlamps may fog up on the inside if there is high atmospheric humidity. Switch on the lights and drive off. The level of moisture diminishes, depending on the length of the journey and the weather conditions (humidity and temperature). If the level of moisture does not diminish: X To activate: activate the Adaptive Highbeam Assist function using the onboard computer (Y page 212). X Turn the light switch to Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow : (Y page 112). If it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps, the _ X X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 115 Lights and windshield wipers Exterior lighting 116 Interior lighting Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting Interior lighting control General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Automatic interior lighting control Lights and windshield wipers X Front overhead control panel : u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off ; | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off = p Switches the right-hand front reading lamp on/off ? c Switches the front interior lighting on/off A p Switches the left-hand front reading lamp on/off To activate/deactivate: press the | button. When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush with the overhead control panel. The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle a door Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock The interior light is activated for a short while when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (Y page 213). Ropen Manual interior lighting control To switch the front interior lighting on/ off: press the c button. X To switch the rear interior lighting on/ off: press the u button. X To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the p button. X Rear-compartment overhead control panel : p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off ; p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off Replacing bulbs The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button. or X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey. Replacing bulbs Important safety notes Xenon bulbs G DANGER Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You could get an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured if you touch the electric contacts on Xenon bulbs. Therefore, never remove the cover from Xenon bulbs. Do not change the Xenon bulbs yourself, but have them replaced at a qualified workshop. If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs, you can recognize this by the following: the cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves from the top to the bottom and back again when you start the engine. For this to be observed, the lights must be switched on before starting the engine. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Otherwise, they could, for example, damage the bulbs and injure themselves. Never use a bulb which has been dropped. Such a bulb may explode and injure you. Halogen bulbs are pressurized and could explode when you change them, especially if they are very hot. You should therefore wear eye protection and gloves when you are changing them. There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs that you cannot replace. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 117). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself changed at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance changing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with your bare hands. Even minor contamination can burn into the glass surface and reduce the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lintfree cloth or only touch the base of the bulb when installing. Only use bulbs of the correct type. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types You can change the following bulbs. The bulb type can be found in the legend. Other bulbs G WARNING Bulbs and lamps can become very hot. For this reason, allow them to cool down before changing them. Otherwise, you could burn yourself when you touch them. Z Lights and windshield wipers Crash-responsive emergency lighting 117 118 Replacing bulbs Changing the front bulbs Lights and windshield wipers Low-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps) Halogen headlamps : Parking lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W ; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W = Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X X Bi-Xenon headlamps : Cornering lamp: H7 55 W High-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps) Tail lamp : Backup lamp: P 21 W ; Brake lamp: P 21 W = Brake lamp/parking lamp: P 21 W X X Switch off the lights. Open the hood. Replacing bulbs Parking lamps/standing lamps (halogen headlamps) Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Pull out bulb holder ;. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ;. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Cornering light function (Bi-Xenon headlamps) Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X X X Changing the rear bulbs Opening and closing the side trim panels You must open the side trim panel in the trunk and remove the first-aid kit before you can change the bulbs in the tail lamps. Z Lights and windshield wipers Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X 119 Replacing bulbs 120 To open: loosen side trim panel : at the top and fold it down in the direction of the arrow. X To close: insert side panel :. X Tail lamp Switch off the lights. Open the trunk. X Open the side trim panel (Y page 119). X X Lights and windshield wipers Right-hand side trim panel Left-hand side trim panel (vehicles with a sound system) To open: turn rotary catch : 90° in the direction of the arrow and remove side trim panel ;. X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turn rotary catch : 90° in the opposite direction to the arrow. X Remove the tail lamp connector Simultaneously press retaining lugs : in the direction of the arrow and slightly pull out the bulb holder with the bulbs. X Remove the connector for LED light functions from the top of the bulb holder. X Pull the bulb holder out with the bulbs. X X : Backup lamp Left-hand side trim panel (vehicles without a sound system) ; Brake lamp = Parking lamp/brake lamp Windshield wipers Press the respective bulb :, ; or = back and turn it counter-clockwise to remove it from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and turn it clockwise. X Reinsert the connector for LED light functions in the bulb holder. X Insert the bulb holder again and lock it in place. X Insert the tail lamp connector. X Close the side trim panel (Y page 119). 121 Windshield wipers Switching the windshield wipers on/ off G WARNING The windshield will not longer be wiped properly if the wiper blades are worn. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring and fall. ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windshield is dry. ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash. 5 6 Combination switch 1 $ Windshield wipers off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low5 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high6 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe/ î To wipe the windshield using washer fluid X X Switch on the ignition. Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windshield becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather. In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windshield wipers to wipe more frequently. Rain sensor set to low sensitivity. Rain sensor set to high sensitivity. Z Lights and windshield wipers X 122 Windshield wipers Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING Lights and windshield wipers For safety reasons, switch off the windshield wipers and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock before changing the wiper blades (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: make sure that the on-board electronics are in state 0). Otherwise, the wiper motor could be switched on suddenly and cause injury. ! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield. Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. ! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper. Changing the windshield wiper blades Removing the wiper blades X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO). X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield until it engages. X Firmly press release knob : and pull the wiper blade upwards from the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow. Installing the wiper blades X Position the new wiper blade in the retainer on the wiper arm and slide it into place in the opposite direction to the arrow. The wiper blade audibly engages. X Make sure that wiper blade is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. Problems with the windshield wipers The windshield wipers are obstructed Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on. The windshield wipers are inoperative The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. Windshield wipers 123 Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X The spray nozzles are misaligned Lights and windshield wipers The windshield washer fluid from the spray nozzles no longer hits the center of the windshield. The spray nozzles are misaligned. X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 124 125 126 126 130 135 Climate control Useful information ............................ Overview of climate control systems ................................................... Operating the climate control systems ................................................... Setting the air vents ......................... 126 Overview of climate control systems Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified Climate control specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Overview of climate control systems Important safety notes G WARNING Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. G WARNING Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior and the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others. Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air. Climate control is only operational when the engine is running. The system only works optimally when the side windows and the roof are closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 135). i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 87). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter can filter out most particles of dust, and completely filters out pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. Since the replacement interval depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet. i It is It is possible that the dehumidification function of the climate control system may be activated automatically an hour after the key has been removed. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes. Overview of climate control systems 127 Climate control Control panel for dual-zone climate control Canada only : Setting the temperature, left (Y page 132) ; Defrosting the windshield (Y page 133) = Switching the ZONE function on/off (Y page 133) ? Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 130) A Switching the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134) B Setting the temperature, right (Y page 132) C Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode (Y page 134) D Setting the air distribution (Y page 132) E Increasing the airflow (Y page 133) F Reducing the airflow (Y page 133) G Switching climate control on/off (Y page 130) H Setting climate control to automatic mode (Y page 131) Z Climate control 128 Overview of climate control systems USA only : Setting the temperature, left (Y page 132) ; Defrosting the windshield (Y page 133) = Switching the maximum cooling MAX COOL on/off (Y page 134) ? Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 130) A Switching the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134) B Setting the temperature, right (Y page 132) C Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode (Y page 134) D Setting the air distribution (Y page 132) E Increasing the airflow (Y page 133) F Reducing the airflow (Y page 133) G Switching climate control on/off (Y page 130) H Setting climate control to automatic mode (Y page 131) Notes on using automatic climate control The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the Ã and ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the Ã and ¿ buttons light up. RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). ROnly use the "defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use "air-recirculation" mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. Overview of climate control systems 129 Climate control Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control Canada only Front control panel : Setting the temperature, left (Y page 132) ; Defrosting the windshield (Y page 133) = Activating/deactivating the residual heat function (Y page 135) ? Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 130) A Switching the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134) B Setting the temperature, right (Y page 132) C Switching the ZONE function on/off (Y page 133) D Switching climate control on/off (Y page 130) E Setting the air distribution (Y page 132) F Increasing the airflow (Y page 133) G Reducing the airflow (Y page 133) H Setting the climate mode (Y page 131) I Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode (Y page 134) J Setting climate control to automatic mode (Y page 131) Rear control panel K Increasing the airflow (Y page 133) L Reducing the airflow (Y page 133) M Display N Reducing the temperature (Y page 132) O Increasing the temperature (Y page 132) Z 130 Operating the climate control systems Climate control Notes on using automatic climate control The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the Ã and ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the Ã and ¿ buttons light up. RIn automatic mode, you can also use the ñ button to set a climate mode (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is recommended. RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). ROnly use the "defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use "air-recirculation" mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment as well. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. RUse the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The "residual heat" function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. Operating the climate control systems Activating/deactivating climate control Points to observe before use G WARNING When the climate control system is deactivated, the outside air supply and circulation are also deactivated. Only choose this setting for a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others. i Switch on climate control primarily using the Ã button (Y page 131). Activating/deactivating Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the Ã button. The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. X To deactivate: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up. X Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification Points to observe before use G WARNING If you switch off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up more quickly. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. The cooling with air dehumidification function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. Operating the climate control systems function uses refrigerant R134a. This coolant does not contain chlorofluorocarbons, and therefore does not damage the ozone layer. Activating/deactivating To activate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up. X To deactivate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. The cooling with air dehumidification function has a delayed switch-off feature. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the Ã button. The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated. X i 3-zone automatic climate control: when automatic mode is activated, you can select a climate mode (Y page 131). X or X Problems with the cooling with air dehumidification function When you press the ¿ button, the indicator lamp in the button flashes three times or remains off. You can no longer switch on the cooling with air dehumidification function. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Setting climate control to automatic G WARNING If you switch off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others. In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. Automatic mode will achieve optimal operation if cooling with air dehumidification is also activated. If desired, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. To select manually: press the _ button. Press the K or I button. The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes out. Automatic air distribution and airflow are deactivated. Adjusting the climate mode settings This function is only available with 3-zone automatic climate control. You can select the following climate mode settings in automatic mode: FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly cooler MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly warmer and with less draft Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the Ã button. X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the desired climate mode appears in the display. X Z Climate control i The cooling with air dehumidification 131 Operating the climate control systems 132 Setting the temperature Climate control Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: turn control : or B clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 127). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). Climate control X 3-zone automatic climate control Turn control : clockwise or counterclockwise (Y page 129). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). X To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the rear control panel: press the 9 or : button on the rear control panel. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). X i If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than 30 minutes, the temperature setting for the rear compartment then switches back to 72 ‡ (22 †). Setting the air distribution Air distribution settings Automatic climate control zones You can select different temperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the rear compartment. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce the temperature in the front: turn controls : and B clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 129). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). X To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the front control panel: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. X 7 Canada only. P Directs air through the center and side air vents O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents S Directs air through the center, side and footwell vents ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents b Directs the airflow through the defroster, center and side air vents7 a Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents _ Directs the airflow through the defroster vents, the center and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents7 i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed when the controls on the side air vents are turned downwards. Operating the climate control systems Adjusting 3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment. X Setting the airflow Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: press the K or I button. i You can use automatic climate control to set the airflow in the rear compartment separately. X Defrosting the windshield You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to defrost the inside of the windshield and the side windows. i You should only select the defrosting function until the windshield is clear again. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights up. The climate control system switches to the following functions: X Rhigh airflow temperature Rair distribution to the windshield and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off Rhigh Switching the ZONE function on/off This function is only available in vehicles for Canada. X To activate: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button lights up. Dual-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side. 3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment. When the buttons for temperature, airflow or air distribution are activated, the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the other climate control zones. X To deactivate: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. Dual-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. or X Press the Ã button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Turn temperature control : or B clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 127), (Y page 129). or X Press the K or I button. Z Climate control Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the _ button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display. The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes out. Automatic control is deactivated and the air distribution is controlled according to the selected setting. 133 Operating the climate control systems 134 MAX COOL maximum cooling The MAX COOL function is only available in vehicles for the USA. MAX COOL is only operational when the engine is running. When you activate MAX COOL, climate control switches to the following functions: Activating/deactivating Rmaximum The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. cooling airflow Rair-recirculation mode on X To activate: press the Ù button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. X To activate: press the Ù button again. The indicator lamp goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Rmaximum Climate control Rear window defroster Defrosting the windows Windows fogged up on the inside Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehumidification function. X Activate automatic mode Ã. X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the defrosting function (Y page 133). X i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. Windows fogged up on the outside Activate the windshield wipers. Press the _ button repeatedly until the O or P symbol appears in the display. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. G WARNING Clear all windows of ice or snow before setting off. Otherwise, impaired visibility could endanger you and others. Problems with the rear window defroster The rear window defroster has deactivated prematurely or cannot be activated. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps or interior lighting. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster is activated again automatically. X X Activating/deactivating airrecirculation mode You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. The operation of air-recirculation mode is the same for all control panels. G WARNING At low outside temperatures, only switch over to air-recirculation mode for brief periods. Setting the air vents Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button lights up. X It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the temperature that has been set. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. i If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. i In the event of high pollution levels8 or at high outside temperatures, airrecirculation mode is automatically activated. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the g button is not lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X To deactivate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button goes out. i Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) with the "cooling with air dehumidification" function switched on. Activating/deactivating the residual heat function Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it. X To activate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights up. X To deactivate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes out. X i Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops Rwhen the auxiliary heating is activated Rwhen Setting the air vents Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the vents. Keep bare skin away from these air vents. If necessary, direct the airflow away to a different area of the vehicle interior. The residual heat function is only available in vehicles for Canada with automatic climate control. 8 3-zone automatic climate control only. Z Climate control Otherwise, the windows could fog up, thus impairing visibility and endangering yourself and others. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions and thereby cause an accident. 135 Setting the air vents 136 In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Setting the side air vents Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior. i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust the sliders of the air vents to the center position. : Side window defroster vent Climate control Setting the center air vents ; Side air vent = Control for side air vent X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = to the left or right. Setting the glove box air vent : Center air vent, left When automatic climate control is activated, the glove box can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings. ; Center air vent, right ! Close the air vent when heating the = Center vent thumbwheel, right ? Center vent thumbwheel, left X To open/close: turn thumbwheels = and ? up or down. vehicle. At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove box could be damaged. : Air vent thumbwheel ; Air vent Setting the air vents X 137 To open/close: turn thumbwheel : clockwise or counter-clockwise. Climate control Setting the rear-compartment air vents : Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel ; Rear-compartment air vent, right = Rear control unit, only with 3-zone automatic climate control9 ? Rear-compartment air vent, left X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or down. 9 Only for Canada. Z 138 Useful information ............................ Breaking-in notes .............................. Driving ............................................... Automatic transmission ................... Refueling ............................................ Parking ............................................... Driving tips ........................................ Driving systems ................................ 140 140 140 148 156 158 160 165 Driving and parking 139 140 Driving Useful information Driving and parking i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Breaking-in notes Important safety notes New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. The first 1,000 miles (1,500 km) The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future. RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km) drive in program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles). RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period. RChange gear in good time, before the tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the tachometer. RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator pedal past the point of resistance (kickdown). ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when driving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain. After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed. Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehicles: RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. RChange gear in good time. i You should also observe these notes on running in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. i Always observe the respective speed limits. AMG vehicles with rear axle locking differential Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking differential on the rear axle. To improve the protection of the differential on the rear axle, change the oil after a break-in distance of 2000 miles (3000 km). This oil change extends the service life of the differential. Have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Driving G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. ! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold. SmartKey positions SmartKey Rshoes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. Rlose ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. g To remove the SmartKey Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windshield wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine The steering is locked when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started. Z Driving and parking Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats. 141 142 Driving Driving and parking KEYLESS-GO General notes RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key: - with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey - with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil - inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can impair the functionality of the KEYLESS-GO key. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESSGO function and a detachable Start/Stop button. The Start/Stop button must be inserted into the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different SmartKey positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. The Start/Stop button can be removed from the ignition lock. Then, you can insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. The vehicle can be started with the Start/Stop button if the SmartKey is in the vehicle. : Start/Stop button ; Ignition lock X Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition lock ;. i When you insert Start/Stop button : into ignition lock ;, the system needs approximately 2 seconds recognition time. You can then use Start/Stop button :. Start/Stop button = USA only ? Canada only Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey being removed from the ignition. X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example. X i If you then open the driver's door when in this position, the power supply is deactivated. X Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop button : twice. Driving driver's door is opened and press Start/Stop button : once when in this position. X Rthe Ryou As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after starting the engine or lights up while driving, see (Y page 247). Starting the engine Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine G WARNING As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave children unattended in the vehicle, as they could otherwise accidentally start the engine. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. i The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/ Stop button must be inserted into the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. ! Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. General notes i The catalytic converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time. Automatic transmission X Shift the transmission to position P. The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P. i You can also start the engine when the transmission is in position N. Starting procedure with the SmartKey i To start the engine using the SmartKey instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/ Stop button out of the ignition lock. Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 3 (Y page 141) and release it as soon as the engine is running. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 142) once. The engine starts. X Pulling away Automatic transmission G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if Z Driving and parking i The power supply is switched off again if: 143 Driving 144 you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the selector lever lock released. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. X Release the parking brake (Y page 159). X Release the brake pedal. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. Driving and parking X ! If a warning tone sounds and the Release Park. Brake message appears in the multifunction display, the parking brake is still applied. Release the parking brake. i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic door lock (Y page 213). i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Take your foot off the brake pedal. The vehicle is then held for about a second. X Pull away. X Hill start assist will not function if: Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient. Rthe transmission is in position N. Rthe parking brake is applied. RESP® is malfunctioning. ECO start/stop function Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. General notes The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Every time you switch on the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO start/stop function is activated. The system is operational when the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 145) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display. If the ECO start/stop function has been manually deactivated (Y page 145) or a Driving Deactivating/activating the ECO start/ stop function Automatic engine switch-off If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. The ECO start/stop function is operational and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in the multifunction display, if: Rthe ECO button Deactivating X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; on button : and the ¤ symbol in the multifunction display go out. Activating X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 145) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 145) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available. i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/ stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. i The ECO start/stop function is activated each time the engine is switched on. indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green Rthe vehicle is stationary. Rthe outside temperature is within the comfort range Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature. Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached. Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. Rthe system detects that the windshield is not fogged up when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe hood is closed. Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened. If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 145) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display. i If you shift the transmission from R to D, the ECO start/stop function is available again once the ¤ symbol reappears in green in the multifunction display. i The engine can be switched off automatically a maximum of four times (first stop and three subsequent stops) in succession. The ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display after the engine has been started automatically for the fourth time. When the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, automatic engine switch-off is again possible. i You can still activate the HOLD function when the vehicle is stationary, even if the Z Driving and parking malfunction has caused the system to be deactivated, the ¤ symbol is not displayed. 145 Driving and parking 146 Driving engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, as the engine must be started first. i During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require full climate control capacity, the ECO start/stop function can be deactivated by pressing the ECO button (Y page 145). Automatic engine start The engine starts automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button. Ryou release the brakes when in transmission position D or N and when the HOLD function is not active. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Ryou engage reverse gear R. Ryou move the transmission out of position P. Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door. Rthe vehicle starts to roll. Rthe brake system requires this. Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range. Rthe system detects moisture on the windshield when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe charge level of the battery is too low. i Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. Driving 147 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. is a malfunction in the fuel supply. X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock before attempting to start the engine again. RThere or X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 143). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 310). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z Driving and parking Problems with the engine Driving and parking 148 Automatic transmission Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. The coolant temperature gauge shows a value above 248 ‡ (120 †). The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down. X Check the coolant level (Y page 290). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary. Automatic transmission Important safety notes Selector lever Overview of transmission positions G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Example: selector lever j Park position with selector lever lock k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive Automatic transmission Transmission positions B Park position Do not shift the transmission into position P(Y page 158) unless the vehicle is stationary. The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the parking brake in addition to the parking lock in order to secure the vehicle. The SmartKey can only be removed if the transmission is in position P. If the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock, the selector lever is locked. If the vehicle electronics are malfunctioning, the selector lever may be locked in position P. To release a locked selector lever, see "Manual override of parking lock" (Y page 155). C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. : Transmission position display ; Drive program display The current position of the selector lever is shown by the indicators next to the selector lever. The indicators light up when the SmartKey is inserted into the ignition lock. The indicators go out when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. Z Driving and parking Transmission position and drive program display 149 150 Automatic transmission Driving and parking A Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. The transmission could otherwise be damaged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: only shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. ! Rolling in neutral N can damage the drive train. 7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. X Program selector button General notes The program selector button allows you to choose between different driving characteristics. Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gearshifting behavior is determined by: Ra shift range restriction, if selected selected drive program (Y page 150) Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Rthe Driving tips Example: program selector button E Economy Comfortable, economical driving S Sport Sporty driving style M Manual Manual gear shifting AMG vehicles i For further information on the automatic When shifting down, the double-clutch function is active regardless of the currently selected drive program. The double-clutch function reduces load change reactions and is conducive to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by the double-clutch function depends on the drive program selected. Only change from automatic drive program E or S to manual drive program M when the vehicle is stationary. X Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired gearshift program appears in the multifunction display. drive program, see (Y page 151). Automatic transmission transmission always switches to automatic drive program E (drive program C in AMG vehicles). i RS cannot be selected during normal driving. For further information on RACE START, see (Y page 179). Driving and parking i When the engine is started, the automatic Steering wheel paddle shifters AMG vehicles Drive program selector with manual drive program C Controlled Efficiency Comfortable, economical driving S Sport Sporty driving style S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty driving style M Manual Manual gear shifting RS RACE START Optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill i For further information on the automatic drive program, see (Y page 151). Only change from automatic drive program C, S or S+ to manual drive program M when the vehicle is stationary. X Turn drive program selector : until the desired drive program appears in the multifunction display in the speedometer. The drive program indicator on drive program selector : lights up in red. i The automatic transmission shifts to automatic drive program C each time the engine is started. 151 : Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter ; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter In the automatic drive program, you can restrict or derestrict the shift range by using the steering wheel paddle shifters (Y page 152). In the manual drive program, you can change gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters or the selector lever (Y page 153). i You can only change gear with the steering wheel paddle shifters when the transmission is in position D. Automatic drive program Drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) is characterized by the following: Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic transmission settings Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully Z 152 Automatic transmission Driving and parking Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin Drive program S (drive programs S and S+ on AMG vehicles) is characterized by the following: Rsporty engine and automatic transmission settings Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points Shift ranges Introduction When the automatic transmission is in position D, it is possible to restrict or derestrict the shift range (Y page 152). The shift range selected is shown in the multifunction display. The automatic transmission shifts only as far as the selected gear. Shift range = You can use the engine's braking effect. 5 To use the braking effect of the engine on downhill gradients and for driving: Ron steep mountain roads mountainous terrain Rin arduous conditions Rin 4 To use the braking effect of the engine on extremely steep downhill gradients and on long downhill stretches Restricting the shift range X Press the selector lever to the left towards D–. or X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter. The automatic transmission shifts down one gear and restricts the shift range to the relevant gear. i If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. i If the maximum engine speed for the shift range is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission shifts up in order to prevent the engine from overrevving, even if the shift range is restricted. Derestricting the shift range X Briefly press the selector lever to the right towards D+. or X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter. The shift range is derestricted. Clearing the shift range restriction X Press and hold the selector lever towards D+ until D is shown once more in the multifunction display. or X Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until D is shown again in the multifunction display. The automatic transmission shifts from the current shift range directly to D. Automatic transmission X Press the selector lever to the left towards D– and hold it in position. Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter and hold it in position. The automatic transmission shifts to the gear which allows optimum acceleration and deceleration. To do this, the automatic transmission shifts down one or more gears. Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 151). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. AMG vehicles ! In manual drive program M, the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. Manual drive program Switching on the manual drive program The manual drive program is only available for vehicles with the dynamic handling package and for AMG vehicles. Manual drive program M differs from drive program S (or, in the case of AMG vehicles, drive programs S and S+) with regard to: Briefly press the selector lever to the right towards D+. or X or X X Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator appears in the multifunction display. Rspontaneity Rresponsiveness Rsmoothness of the gear changes X Press the program selector button (Y page 150) repeatedly until M appears in the multifunction display. X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program selector (Y page 151) until M appears in the multifunction display. The indicator M on the drive program selector lights up in red. : Gear indicator ; Upshift indicator Downshifting X Upshifting or i Vehicles with the dynamic handling X package: if the maximum engine speed for the shift range is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission shifts up. If manual drive program M is selected, the automatic transmission does not shift up. Briefly press the selector lever to the left towards D–. Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 151). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. i If you brake the vehicle or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission will shift down to a gear that will allow the vehicle to accelerate or pull away again. Z Driving and parking Selecting the ideal shift range 153 Automatic transmission 154 Driving and parking i Vehicles with the dynamic handling package: to avoid overrevving the engine when downshifting, the automatic transmission does not shift to a lower gear if this would result in the maximum engine speed being exceeded. i For maximum acceleration, push the selector lever to the left or pull and hold the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until the transmission shifts to the optimal gear for the current speed. Kickdown i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to use kickdown in manual drive program M. You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. i During kickdown, you cannot change gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters or the selector lever. Switching off the manual drive program Vehicles with the dynamic handling package: press the program selector button (Y page 150). M is no longer shown in the multifunction display. X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program selector (Y page 151) until C, S or S+ appears in the multifunction display. X Automatic transmission 155 Problems with the transmission Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no X Stop the vehicle. longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Releasing the parking lock manually In the event of an electrical malfunction, it is possible to release the selector lever lock manually to move it out of position P. This is the case, for example, if you wish to tow the vehicle away. cloth) from the right-hand edge. Pull selector lever gaiter : up and out. X Press release button ; down and simultaneously move the selector lever out of position P. The selector lever can now be moved freely until it is returned to position P. Transfer case This section is only valid for vehicles with 4wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always transmitted to both axles. ! Performance tests may only be carried ! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to remove the selector lever gaiter from the center console. This could damage the selector lever gaiter. X X Apply the parking brake. Pry off selector lever gaiter : with a flat, blunt object (e.g. a screwdriver wrapped in out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system or transfer case could otherwise be damaged. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a performance test. ! If the parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer, the ignition must be switched off (SmartKey or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1), as ESP® will Z Driving and parking Problem 156 Refueling otherwise automatically intervene. The brake system could otherwise be damaged. Driving and parking ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. Refueling Important safety notes G WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious personal injury. Never allow sparks, flames or smoking materials near gasoline. Turn off the engine before refueling. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing contact. Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging to your health. G WARNING Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas discharge. This could cause the gasoline to spray back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury. wrong fuel result in damage to the fuel system and engine. ! Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection system could be blocked by particles from the fuel can. Further information on fuel and on fuel grades can be found in the "Fuel" section (Y page 352). Refueling Opening/closing the fuel filler flap G WARNING E85 fuel (ethanol) and its vapours are poisonous, highly flammable and highly combustible. E85 fuel can cause serious injury if ignited, if you come into contact with it you or if you inhale fuel vapors. Avoid inhaling E85 fuel vapors and avoid skin contact with E85 fuel. Extinguish any naked flames before refueling. Keep sparks away from E85 fuel, and do not smoke. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Even small amounts of the : To open the fuel filler flap ; To insert the fuel filler cap = Tire pressure table ? Fuel type to be used The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you open or close the vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESSGO. Refueling Fuel filler flap emergency release X Open the trunk lid. X Open the right-hand side trim panel (Y page 315). Driving and parking The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. Opening Switch off the engine. Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door. This corresponds to key position 0: "SmartKey removed". The driver’s door can be closed again. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap opens slightly. X Open the fuel filler flap fully. X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of filler flap ;. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. 157 X X Pull emergency release : in the direction of the arrow. The fuel filler flap is unlocked. X Open the fuel filler flap. X Closing Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. X i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the central locking prevents the fuel filler flap from closing. i If you drive with the fuel filler cap open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A message appears in the multifunction display (Y page 232). In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up (Y page 253). Z 158 Parking Problems with fuel and the fuel tank Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. vehicle. G WARNING There is danger of fire or explosions. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it immediately (Y page 141). X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. or The SmartKey battery is discharged. X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 76). X Open the trunk lid. X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release (Y page 157). The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Important safety notes G WARNING If flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs are exposed to prolonged contact to parts of the exhaust system that heat up, they could ignite. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rreleasing the parking brake the automatic transmission out of the parking position P Rstarting the engine. They could also operate the vehicle's equipment. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rshifting ! A moving vehicle can lead to damage to the vehicle or damage to the drive train. To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe parking brake must be applied. transmission must be in position P and the SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock. Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front wheels must be turned towards the curb. Rthe Switching off the engine Important safety notes G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Vehicles with automatic transmission X X Apply the parking brake firmly. Shift the transmission to position P. Using the SmartKey X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobilizer is activated. i The SmartKey can only be removed if the SmartKey position 0 or "SmartKey removed". If you try to switch off the engine when the transmission is not in position P, a message appears in the multifunction display. A signal sounds. Parking brake G WARNING If you must brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the braking distance is considerably longer and the wheels could lock. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Only use the parking brake to brake the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the wheels lock, release the parking brake until the wheels begin turning again. G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rreleasing the parking brake the automatic transmission out of the parking position P Rstarting the engine. They could also operate the vehicle's equipment. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rshifting transmission is in position P. Using KEYLESS-GO Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 142). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. i When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to SmartKey position 1. When the driver's door is open, it corresponds to X Z 159 Driving and parking Parking Driving tips 160 To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly. When the engine is running, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. X To release: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Pull release handle :. When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp goes out in the instrument cluster. Driving and parking X Parking the vehicle for a long period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. X Connecting a trickle charger. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. road, weather and traffic conditions permit. In some jurisdictions, it is forbidden for drivers to use mobile phones while driving. Only operate the audio system or COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System) in compliance with all legal requirements and when the road, weather and traffic conditions permit. You may otherwise not be able to observe the traffic conditions, endangering yourself and others. Remember that your vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) a second when it is traveling at only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h). G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Drive sensibly – save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure. X Remove unnecessary loads. X Remove roof racks when they are not needed. X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. X Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or by the service interval display. X Driving tips General driving tips Important safety notes G WARNING Always remember that you must concentrate primarily on driving the vehicle. The driver's concentration must always be directed primarily at road traffic. For your own safety and that of others, we recommend that you stop the vehicle at a safe place and in accordance with the traffic conditions before making or accepting a phone call. Comply with all legal requirements if you use the telephone while driving. Use the handsfree system and only use the telephone when Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic and in mountainous terrain. Driving tips G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Exhaust check G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits. These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. For this reason, all work on the engine must be carried out by qualified and authorized MercedesBenz technicians. The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. ECO display The ECO display provides feedback on how economical your driving characteristics are. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and existing conditions. Consumption can be significantly influenced by your driving style. Driving and parking Drinking and driving 161 Example: ECO display The ECO display consists of three bars: RAcceleration RConstant RCoasting The percentage count is the mean value of the three bar values. The three bars and the mean value begin at the value of 50%. A higher percentage count indicates a more economical driving style. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed consumption figure in mpg (l/100 km). In addition to driving style, the consumption is affected by many other factors, such as: RLoad RTire pressure start RChoice of route RThe use of electrical consumers These factors are not included in the ECO display. The evaluation of your driving style takes the following three categories into consideration: Acceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes) RCold The bar fills up: The bar empties: Moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds Sporty acceleration Z 162 Driving tips Constant (assessment of driving behavior at all times) Driving and parking The bar fills up: The bar empties: Constant speed and Fluctuations in avoidance of speed unnecessary acceleration and deceleration Coasting (assessment of all deceleration processes) The bar fills up: The bar empties: Anticipatory driving, Frequent braking keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator: the vehicle can coast without use of the brakes i An economical driving style involves driving with a moderate engine speed. To achieve a higher value in the categories "acceleration" and "smooth driving": Robserve the gearshift recommendation. Rdrive the vehicle in drive program E (vehicles with automatic transmission). i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the freeway, only the bar for "smooth driving" will change. i The ECO display summarizes the driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its completion. Therefore, there are dynamic changes in the bars at the start of a journey. During a prolonged driving time, these changes are smaller. For dynamic changes, perform a manual reset. For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 204). Braking: Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients ! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting early to a lower gear. This allows you to take advantage of the engine braking effect and helps avoid overheating and excessive wear of the brakes. When you take advantage of the engine braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface. This could cause damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty. Heavy and light loads G WARNING If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. Driving tips If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed. You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salttreated roads If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance. RBrake occasionally to remove any possible salt residue. Make sure that you do not endanger other road users when doing so. RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead. Servicing the brakes ! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and you hear a warning tone while the engine is running, the brake fluid level may be too low. Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display. The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. Have the brake system checked immediately. This work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to arrange this. Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you are planning to have the vehicle tested on such a dynamometer, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to obtain further information first. Otherwise, you could damage the drive train or the brake system. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® system operates automatically, the engine and the ignition must be switched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) while the parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer. Braking maneuvers triggered automatically by ESP® may seriously damage the brake system. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® system operates automatically, the engine and the ignition system must be switched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) when: Rtesting the parking brake on a brake dynamometer. Ryou intend to have the vehicle towed with the front axle raised. Braking maneuvers triggered automatically by ESP® may seriously damage the brake system. If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. To do so, press firmly on the brake pedal when driving at a high speed. This improves the grip of the brake pads. You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS) on (Y page 63) or of BAS PLUS on (Y page 63). Z Driving and parking Wet roads 163 Driving and parking 164 Driving tips Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. High-performance brake system for AMG vehicles The high-performance brake system is installed only on the C 63 AMG. The high-performance brake system is designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This will depend on: Rspeed Rbraking force Renvironmental conditions, such as temperature and humidity The wear and tear on individual brake system components, e.g. brake pads/linings or discs, depends on: Rthe individual driving style operating conditions For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain further information about this from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Rthe Driving on wet roads G WARNING Hydroplaning New vehicle brake pads and discs, and replacement brake pads and discs may take several hundred miles of driving until they provide optimum braking efficiency. Until that time, you may need to use increased brake pedal pressure while braking. Please be aware of this and adjust your driving and braking accordingly during this break-in period. Excessive high-demand braking will cause correspondingly high brake wear. Please be attentive to the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster and brake condition messages in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is important to maintain and have the brake system checked regularly. If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds. tires have adequate tread depth. For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following manner: Rthe Rlower your speed. ruts. Rbrake carefully. Ravoid Driving on flooded roads ! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check the depth of any water before driving through it. Drive slowly through standing water. Otherwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or the engine compartment. This can damage the electronic components in the engine or the automatic Driving systems Winter driving: Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 320). Driving with summer tires Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 320). Slippery road surfaces G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G WARNING The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Shift the transmission to position N. i For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 321). Driving systems Cruise control Important safety notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). Z Driving and parking transmission. Water can also be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles and this can cause engine damage. 165 166 Driving systems Driving and parking G WARNING The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle's speed and for safe brake operation. Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic, and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a constant speed. RThe use of the cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a constant speed. RThe use of the cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control. RDeactivate the cruise control when driving in fog. The "Resume" function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed. When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. In the multifunction display, the segments between the stored speed and the maximum speed light up. Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. G WARNING The cruise control brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. Cruise control lever Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G WARNING The set speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X : To activate or increase speed ; To activate or reduce speed = To deactivate cruise control ? To activate at the current speed/last stored speed Driving systems G WARNING Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has made the necessary adjustments. Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and/ or serious injury to you and others. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to beyond the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards =. or X Brake. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Ryou depress the parking brake. are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h). RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®. Ryou shift the transmission to position N while driving. If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise Control Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Ryou i When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared. DISTRONIC PLUS Important safety notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-moving vehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in order to maintain the preset distance to the vehicle in front. G WARNING The DISTRONIC PLUS requires familiarity with its operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following information carefully before operating the system. G WARNING The DISTRONIC PLUS is a convenience system. Its speed adjustment reduction Z Driving and parking Setting a speed 167 Driving and parking 168 Driving systems capability is intended to make cruise control more effective and usable when traffic speeds vary. It is not however, intended to, nor does it, replace the need for extreme care. The responsibility for the vehicle's speed, distance to the preceding vehicle and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure a safe stopping distance, always remains with the driver. The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by the DISTRONIC PLUS. This could result in wrong or missing distance warnings. If you want DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor system must be activated (Y page 213) and operational. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control in the speed range between 20 mph (Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada: 200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front of you, it operates in the speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada: 200 km/h). Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the responsible authorities. You can refer to the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use the device in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS distance is not a substitute for the active intervention of the driver. It does not detect pedestrians or stationary objects, nor can it detect, recognize or predict the road's course or the movements of vehicles in front. DISTRONIC PLUS can only brake the vehicle using 40% of the vehicle's maximum available brake force. DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle, especially if the vehicles are not driving on the middle of their lane. The driver must always pay careful attention to the road, weather and traffic conditions. The driver must drive, steer and brake in a manner which will allow him to always have control of the vehicle. Sources of high-frequency radio waves, such as toll stations, speed-measuring radar, etc., can cause DISTRONIC PLUS to fail temporarily. G WARNING The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take road and traffic conditions into account. Only use the DISTRONIC PLUS if the road, weather and traffic conditions make it advisable to travel at a constant speed. G WARNING Use of the DISTRONIC PLUS can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control. The DISTRONIC PLUS does not function in adverse sight and distance conditions. Do not use the DISTRONIC PLUS during conditions of fog, heavy rain, snow or sleet. G WARNING The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take weather conditions into account. Switch off the DISTRONIC PLUS or do not switch it on if: Rroads are slippery or covered with snow or ice. The wheels could lose traction while braking or accelerating, and the vehicle could skid. Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS system sensor covers are dirty or visibility is diminished due to snow, rain or fog, for example. The distance control system functionality could be impaired. Always pay attention to surrounding traffic conditions even while the DISTRONIC PLUS is switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able to recognize dangerous situations until it is too late. This could cause an accident in which you and/or others could be injured. G WARNING The "Resume" function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed. G WARNING Your undivided attention to street and traffic conditions is necessary at all times whether DISTRONIC PLUS is active or not. The use of DISTRONIC PLUS can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a constant speed. DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to stationary objects on the road (for example, a vehicle stopped in traffic or an abandoned vehicle). DISTRONIC PLUS likewise does not react to oncoming vehicles. Deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: Rwhen changing to the right lane, if the vehicles in the left lane are driving slower Rwhen driving into a filter lane or an expressway exit Rin complex driving situations, for example in construction sites on an expressway In these situations DISTRONIC PLUS will maintain the set speed if it is not deactivated. DISTRONIC PLUS is intended only for maintaining a set speed and a set distance from the objects moving in front of the vehicle. G WARNING An intermittent warning sounds and the distance warning lamp · in the instrument cluster is illuminated if the DISTRONIC PLUS system calculates that the distance to the vehicle ahead and your vehicle's current speed indicate that the DISTRONIC PLUS will not be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the preset following distance, which creates a danger of a collision. Immediately brake the vehicle to increase your distance to the preceding vehicle. The warning sound is intended as a final caution in which you should intercede with your own braking inputs to avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede with your own braking. This will result in potentially dangerous emergency braking which will not always result in an impact being avoided. Tailgating increases the risk of an accident. Z 169 Driving and parking Driving systems 170 Driving systems Driving and parking G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with a maximum deceleration of 13 ft/s2 (4 m/s2). This corresponds to approximately 40% of your vehicle's maximum braking force. To avoid a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes the vehicle just enough to restore the preset speed or the preset distance to the vehicle in front. G WARNING If you do not receive visual or acoustic warning signals during a critical traffic situation, DISTRONIC PLUS has either not recognized the collision risk, has been deactivated or is malfunctioning. Remember, whether or not DISTRONIC PLUS is operating, it is ultimately always the drivers responsibility to apply the brakes in order to control the vehicle and avoid a collision. Cruise control lever : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; To store the current speed or a lower speed = To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS ? To store the current speed or calling up the last stored speed A To set the specified minimum distance Switching on DISTRONIC PLUS, storing and maintaining the current speed Important safety notes G WARNING The vehicle can be braked when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. For this reason, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing). In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes after pulling away before DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. Rthe parking brake must be released. RESP® must be active, but not intervening. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe hood must be closed. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors must be closed. Rthe vehicle must not skid. Activating while driving You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when driving at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), only if the vehicle in front has been detected and is shown in the multifunction display. If the vehicle in front is no longer detected and displayed, DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and a tone sounds. Driving systems i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Override message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slowermoving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. Activating when driving towards a stationary vehicle If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your vehicle is stationary as well. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, or press it up : or down ;. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at under 20 mph(30 km/h) if a vehicle in front has been detected. Therefore, the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the instrument cluster should be activated (Y page 209). X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly up : or down ; until the desired speed is set. i You can use the cruise control lever to set the stored speed and the control on the cruise control lever to set the specified minimum distance (Y page 173). Pulling away X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. Driving If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is driving faster, it accelerates your vehicle, but only up to the speed you have stored. G WARNING If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary. DISTRONIC PLUS then no longer brakes your vehicle. In such cases, control the distance from vehicles travelling in front with the brake alone. You could otherwise cause an accident and thereby injure yourself and others. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the speed being driven and for braking in good time. Changing lanes If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC PLUS supports you when: Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph(60 km/h). RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front. Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal. RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision. Z Driving and parking Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, or press it up : or down ;. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly up : or down ; until the desired speed is set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. X 171 Driving and parking 172 Driving systems If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS monitors the left lane on left-hand drive vehicles and the right lane on right-hand drive vehicles. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS and Active Blind Spot Assist are only aids designed to assist driving. They do not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Stopping G WARNING Never get out of the vehicle when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. DISTRONIC PLUS must also never be operated, activated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle. DISTRONIC PLUS does not replace the parking brake and must not be used for parking. The DISTRONIC PLUS braking effect is canceled and the vehicle can start moving if: RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated using the cruise control lever. Ryou accelerate. Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an interruption in the power supply, e.g. battery failure. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. i Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. You will see a warning message in the multifunction display if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened. Rthe engine is switched off. Rthe hood is opened. Select Park (P) X Shift the transmission to position P to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. The warning message in the multifunction display disappears. The horn will also sound at regular intervals if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and you: Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's door and remove your seat belt Ropen the hood The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact that the vehicle has been parked while DISTRONIC PLUS is still activated. The sound becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. The vehicle is not locked until DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. i If the engine has been switched off, it cannot be started again until DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated. Driving systems Setting a speed Storing the current speed or calling up a stored speed G WARNING The set speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. G WARNING X Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has made the necessary adjustments. Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and/ or serious injury to you and others. Setting the specified minimum distance Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to beyond the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ;, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 174). G WARNING It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to select the appropriate setting given road conditions, traffic, driver's preferred driving style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance. i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Z Driving and parking If DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and a malfunction occurs in the system or if there is a disruption in the power supply, the Brake Immediately message is shown in the multifunction display. Immediately depress the brake firmly until the warning message in the multifunction display goes out or shift the transmission to position P. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. 173 Driving systems 174 Driving and parking If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front : and stored speed = light up. DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the multifunction display To increase: turn control ; in direction =. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X General notes In the Assistance menu (Y page 209) of the on-board computer, you can select the distance display. Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated X Select the Distance Display function with the on-board computer (Y page 209). When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will see the following in the multifunction display: i Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently safe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speedometer : Symbol for activated PRE-SAFE® Brake ; Vehicle in front, if detected = Distance indicator, current distance to the vehicle in front ? Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable A Own vehicle When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two segments ; in the set speed range light up. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated X Select the Distance Display function with the on-board computer (Y page 209). You will see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. After this time, you will see the following in Driving systems There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored remains stored until : DISTRONIC PLUS activated ; Own vehicle = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable ? Vehicle in front, if detected Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated and releases the brakes if the vehicle is slowed down to a speed below 20 mph (30km/h) by the system, provided that DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a vehicle directly in front. At this point, the driver must apply the brakes in order to slow down further and bring the vehicle to a standstill. you switch off the engine. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the parking brake. are driving slower than 15 mph(25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehicle in front is no longer detected. RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®. Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position. Ryou switch off the radar sensor system (Y page 213). Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the frontpassenger door or one of the rear doors is open. Rthe vehicle has skidded. If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. If the vehicle has been stopped by DISTRONIC PLUS and a malfunction occurs in the system, the Brake Immediately message appears in the multifunction display. Depress the brake pedal immediately so that the vehicle does not roll away. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated, and the message disappears. Ryou Z Driving and parking the multifunction display while DISTRONIC PLUS is activated: 175 176 Driving systems Driving and parking Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS Important safety notes The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend G WARNING The DISTRONIC PLUS works to maintain the speed selected by the driver unless a moving obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the same travel direction is detected (e.g. following another vehicle ahead of you at your set distance). This means that: RYour vehicle can pass another vehicle after The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. Vehicles traveling on a different line you have changed lanes. in a sharp turn or if the preceding vehicle is in a sharp turn, the DISTRONIC PLUS could lose sight of the preceding vehicle. Your vehicle could then accelerate to the previously selected speed. The DISTRONIC PLUS regulates only the distance between your vehicle and those directly ahead of it. It may not register stationary objects in the road, e.g.: RWhile Ra stopped vehicle in a traffic jam disabled vehicle Ran oncoming vehicle The driver must always be alert, observe all traffic and intercede as required by means of steering or braking the vehicle. Ra G WARNING The DISTRONIC PLUS should not be used in snowy or icy road conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles traveling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Other vehicles changing lanes Driving systems DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. 177 Crossing vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the road, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Obstructions and stationary vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. Dynamic handling package with sports mode General notes The most important part of the dynamic handling package with sports mode is the adjustable damping system. This automatically controls and adapts the suspension to the respective driving situation. The calibration of the suspension depends on: DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. Ryour driving style road surface conditions Ryour individual selection; see the following description If your vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission, the dynamic handling package with sports mode also includes steering wheel paddle shifters (Y page 151) with a manual drive program (Y page 153). Rthe Z Driving and parking Narrow vehicles Driving systems 178 HOLD function Driving and parking General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen Example: position of dynamic handling package with sports mode button X Start the engine. Sports tuning The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in sports mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. Your selection remains stored until you switch off the engine. X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. Sports suspension tuning is selected. Depending on the engine output, the accelerator pedal is more responsive. On vehicles with automatic transmission, drive program S is selected. Comfort tuning In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style. Select comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of freeway. X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. Comfortable suspension tuning is selected. On vehicles with automatic transmission, drive program E is selected. pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if: Rthe vehicle is stationary. engine is running. Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened. Rthe parking brake is released. Rthe hood is closed. Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N. RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. Rthe Activating the HOLD function Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until ë appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. X i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. G WARNING The vehicle's brakes are applied when the HOLD function is activated. For this reason, deactivate the HOLD function if the vehicle is Driving systems Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R. Ryou shift the transmission to position P. Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until ë disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. G WARNING Never get out of the vehicle when the HOLD function is activated. The HOLD function must never be operated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle. The HOLD function does not replace the parking brake and must not be used for parking. The braking effect of the HOLD function is canceled and the vehicle could roll away if: Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an interruption in the power supply, e.g. battery failure. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. If you leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away. You will see a warning message in the multifunction display if the HOLD function is activated and: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened. Rthe engine is switched off. Rthe hood is opened. Select Park (P) X Shift the transmission to position P to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. The HOLD function is deactivated. The warning message in the multifunction display disappears. A horn will also sound at regular intervals if the HOLD function is activated and you: Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's door and remove your seat belt Ropen the hood The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact that the vehicle has been parked while the HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. The vehicle is not locked until the HOLD function is deactivated. i If the engine has been switched off, it cant be started again until the HOLD function has been deactivated. If there is a malfunction in the system or power supply while the HOLD function is activated, the Brake Immediately message is shown in the multifunction display. Immediately depress the brake firmly until the warning message in the multifunction display goes out. You can also shift the transmission to position P. This deactivates the HOLD function. RACE START Important safety notes i RACE START is only available in AMG vehicles. RACE START enables optimal acceleration from a standing start. The precondition for this is a suitable high-grip road surface. Z Driving and parking to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing). 179 Driving systems 180 Driving and parking G WARNING RACE START is only available when SPORT handling mode is activated. SPORT handling mode only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited extent in the event of swerving or wheelspin. RACE START should only be used on specially designated roads. Always adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. Conditions for activation You can activate RACE START if: Rthe doors are closed. Rthe engine is running and it has reached an operating temperature of approximately 176 ‡ (80 †). This is the case when the engine oil temperature in the multifunction display stops flashing. RSPORT handling mode is activated (Y page 66). Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is depressed (left foot). Rthe transmission is in position D. Activating RACE START Depress the brake pedal with your left foot and keep it depressed. X Turn the drive program selector clockwise (Y page 150) until the RS lamp lights up. The multifunction display shows the RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message. i If the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled, RACE START is canceled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START Canceled message. X X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 151). or To confirm: pull the right steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 151). The RACE START Available Depress gas pedal message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal fully within two seconds, RACE START is canceled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START Not Possible See Operator's Manual message. X Fully depress the accelerator pedal. The engine speed rises to approximately 3,500 rpm. The RACE START Release brake to start message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not release the brake pedal within five seconds, RACE START is canceled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START Canceled message. X X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. The RACE START Active message appears in the multifunction display. RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph (Canada: 50 km/h). Drive program S+ is activated. SPORT handling mode remains activated. RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START Not Possible See Operator's Manual message. i If RACE START is used repeatedly within a short period of time, it is only available Driving systems need for extreme care. The responsibility during parking and other critical maneuvers always remains with the driver. 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) G WARNING G WARNING Make sure no persons or animals are in or near the area in which you are parking/ maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be injured. If a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficient traction: RWhile driving off, apply as little throttle as possible. RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal. RAdapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions. Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid. 4MATIC cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed. ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground. PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition the transmission to position D, R or N Rrelease the parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front and four sensors in the rear. Rshift 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary. PARKTRONIC Important safety notes G WARNING The PARKTRONIC is a supplemental system. It is not intended to, nor does it replace, the : Example: sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side Range of the sensors General notes The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking Z Driving and parking again after the vehicle has been driven a certain distance. 181 182 Driving systems Driving and parking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 295). The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. Minimum distance Side view Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm) Corners Approx. 6 in(approx. 15 cm) If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. Warning displays Top view Front sensors Center Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) Rear sensors Center Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the center air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the headliner in the rear compartment. Driving systems 183 Warning display for the front area : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle = Segments showing operational readiness The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. The selected transmission position determines which warning display is active when the engine is running. Transmission position Warning display D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle is rolling backwards Rear and front areas activated P No areas activated : Indicator lamp ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Guidance is also deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. Z Driving and parking Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC 184 Driving systems Problems with PARKTRONIC Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds, and the indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 295). warning displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or approximately ultrasound waves. 20 seconds. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. Parking Guidance Important safety notes i Parking Guidance is only available in Canada. Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to measure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A suitable parking space is indicated by the parking symbol. You receive steering instructions when parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 181). G WARNING Parking Guidance is merely an aid and may display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, for example: Rno-parking areas spaces with unsuitable surfaces (road surface) Rdriveways Rentrances and exits Parking Guidance detects and measures potential parking spaces while driving past. Changes to the parking space after this point are not taken into account, for example if the vehicle in front of or behind the parking space changes position or objects in the parking space are moved. Even when using Parking Guidance, you are still responsible for driving carefully. If you rely on Parking Guidance alone, you could Rparking Driving systems G WARNING Objects located above the height range of Parking Guidance will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These objects are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. Under some circumstances, Parking Guidance might therefore issue steering instructions too soon. This may lead to a collision. For this reason, you should avoid using Parking Guidance in such situations. G WARNING Make sure that no persons or animals are in the maneuvering range. Otherwise, they could be injured. ! Pay particular attention to low objects or objects with flat surfaces, such as trailer drawbars, posts, cross beams and curbs. These types of objects cannot be detected by Parking Guidance and may damage the vehicle. When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking Guidance is also unavailable. Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces: are parallel to the direction of travel are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, i.e. not on the pavement, for example. Parking Guidance may not detect flat curbs Parking tips: Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 182) warning messages during the parking procedure. Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you must not use Parking Guidance. Rnever use Parking Guidance with snow chains or an emergency spare wheel mounted. Rmake sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct effect on the steering instructions. Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. In some cases, Parking Guidance may guide you too far or not far enough into a parking space. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, cancel the parking procedure with Parking Guidance. Rpay ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. Detecting a parking space Rthat Rthat Ron narrow roads, drive past the parking space as close as possible. Rparking spaces that are littered, overgrown or partially occupied by trailer drawbars might be identified incorrectly or not at all. : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Parking Guidance is automatically activated when you drive forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the Z Driving and parking cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Safety always remains your responsibility and you must continue paying careful attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and maneuvering. 185 Driving and parking 186 Driving systems system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When driving at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right = or the left : also appears. Parking Guidance only displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. To park on the driver's side, you must leave the driver's side turn signal switched on until you have engaged reverse gear. Parking Guidance will only detect parking spaces: are parallel to the direction of travel are at least 5 ft (1.5 m) wide Rthat are at least 4.3 ft (1.3 m) longer than your vehicle A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Shift the transmission to position R. The multifunction display shows the Check Vehicle Surroundings Press 'OK' to Confirm message. X Press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel to confirm. The multifunction display switches to Parking Guidance. Depending on your distance from the parking space, the Please Drive Backward message will appear in the multifunction display. X Rthat Rthat X If necessary, reverse towards the parking space. This is indicated by an arrow pointing backwards. Continue backing up until you hear a tone. Stop – the parking position has been reached. The arrow is white. The Please Steer Wheel to the Right or Please Steer Wheel to the Left message appears in the multifunction display. X While the vehicle is stationary, turn the steering wheel in the specified direction Parking G WARNING The Parking Guidance is only an aid and may not detect all obstacles. The Parking Guidance does not relieve you of the responsibility to pay attention. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and maneuvering. Otherwise, you could endanger yourself and others. Driving systems X X Maneuver if necessary. Always observe the warning messages displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 182). Canceling Parking Guidance X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the center console (Y page 183). Parking Guidance is canceled immediately and PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Guidance is canceled automatically if it is no longer possible to guide you into the parking space, or if a malfunction occurs. The parking space symbol goes out and a warning tone sounds. The Parking Guidance Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. Rear view camera Important safety notes The rear view camera is an optical parking aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle in the COMAND display. G WARNING Make sure that no persons or animals are in the maneuvering range. Otherwise, they could be injured. The rear view camera is located in the handle strip of the trunk lid. : Rear view camera View through the camera The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. G WARNING The rear view camera is only an aid and may display obstacles Rfrom a distorted perspective Rinaccurately Rmay not display obstacles at all The rear view camera does not relieve you of the responsibility to be cautious. Take care and pay careful attention. The rear view camera may not show objects which are Rvery close to the rear bumper the rear bumper Rabove the trunk handle Runder Z Driving and parking until the arrow is white and a warning tone sounds. X To reverse into the parking space: maintain the steering wheel angle and reverse carefully. X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone, The vehicle has reached the position in which you need to countersteer. The Please Steer Wheel to the Left or Please Steer Wheel to the Right message appears in the multifunction display. X Countersteering: while the vehicle is stationary, turn the steering wheel in the specified direction until the arrow is white and a warning tone sounds. X To reverse into the parking space: maintain the steering wheel angle and reverse carefully. X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone, at the latest when PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone. The Parking Guidance Finished message appears in the multifunction display and a tone sounds. You may be asked to steer in a different direction and then change gear. In this case, further displays in the multifunction display will direct you to the final position. 187 Driving systems Driving and parking 188 You are responsible for safety at all times and must continue to pay attention to the immediate surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This includes the area behind, in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwise you could endanger yourself and/or others. G WARNING The rear view camera will not function or will not fully function if: Rthe trunk lid is open Rit is raining or snowing strongly or if it is foggy Rit is night or if you are parking/ maneuvering your vehicle in a very dark area Ra very bright white light is affecting the camera Rthe immediate vicinity is illuminated with fluorescent light (the display of the COMAND system can flicker) Rtemperature changes abruptly, for example if you drive out of the cold into a heated garage (condensation on the lens) Rthe camera lens is dirty or covered Rthe rear of your vehicle is damaged In this case, have the position and the setting of the camera checked at a specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you consult a MercedesBenz Center for this purpose. Do not use the rear view camera in these situations. You could otherwise injure yourself and other people and/or cause damage - including damage to your vehicle while parking/maneuvering. Activating the rear view camera Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the rear view camera function is selected in COMAND (see the X separate operating instructions for COMAND). X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND display. ATTENTION ASSIST Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys such as on freeways and interstate highways. It is active in the range between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h). If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests you take a break. G WARNING ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid and may detect your tiredness or lapses in concentration too late or not at all. It is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. Fatigue may cause you to recognize hazardous situations too late, misjudge a situation or react more slowly. For this reason, make sure you feel rested before you begin driving and during your journey. Make sure that you take regular breaks in time, particularly on long journeys. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking the following criteria into account: Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering characteristics Rdriving conditions, e.g. time, driving time The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than 112 mph (180 km/h) Rif you are currently using COMAND or making a telephone call with it Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed Warning and display messages in the multifunction display after 15 minutes at the earliest. The precondition for this is that ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue your journey and starts assessing your tiredness again if: Ryou switch off the engine. take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break. Ryou Lane Tracking package General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 189) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 191). Blind Spot Assist X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 210). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your journey has begun. You then hear an intermittent warning tone twice and the Attention Assist: Drowsiness Detected message appears in the multifunction display. X If necessary, take a break. X Press the a button to confirm the message. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break, you will be warned again Important safety notes Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle. It supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible collision warning. Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring purposes. G WARNING Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It may fail to detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. Z 189 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 190 Driving systems Monitoring may be affected by dirty sensors, strong spray or poor visibility caused by snow, rain or mist, for example. In this case, vehicles are detected late or not at all. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be activated (Y page 213) and operational. Monitoring range of the sensors Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. G WARNING Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles that approach and drive past at high speeds are not detected. There is no display and no warning. If the lanes are very wide, it may not be possible to monitor the complete width of the neighboring lane. For this reason, vehicles in the next lane may not be detected, especially if they are driving in a staggered formation. This may be the case if vehicles are driving at that edge of their lane which is furthest away from your vehicle. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles driving at the inner edge of their lanes. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time. The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free from dirt, ice or slush around the sensors. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Indicator and warning display : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. G WARNING Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). The indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Switching on Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that the radar sensor system (Y page 213) and Blind Spot Assist (Y page 210) are activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. Lane Keeping Assist Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and may detect the lane markings on the road incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun, or reflection from other vehicles. Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane are present. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected. Z 191 Driving and parking Driving systems 192 Driving systems Driving and parking Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear, e.g. near roadworks. Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. Rthe road is narrow and winding. Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of camera :, at the top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally. : Active Lane Keeping Assist camera If you select km on the on-board computer in the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function (Y page 211), Lane Keeping Assist is active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Switching on Lane Keeping Assist X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive Adaptive(Y page 210). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, symbol : is shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. Standard If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Adaptive If Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. Driving systems Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe Ryou road has narrow lanes. cut the corner on a bend. Active Driving Assistance package General notes The Active Driving Assistance package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 167), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 189) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 196). Active Blind Spot Assist Important safety notes G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid, and may detect vehicles/obstacles incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthe rear and/or front sensors are dirty. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. It cannot detect vehicles that are overtaken at a small distance and then enter the blind spot area. Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the side areas of your vehicle which are in back of the driver. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible collision warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. To support the coursecorrecting brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist also uses the forward-facing radar sensor system. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph(30 km/h). For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be activated (Y page 213) and operational. Monitoring range of the sensors G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles that approach and drive past at high speeds are not detected. No visual nor audible warnings are emitted and the system does not brake the vehicle to correct your course. Z Driving and parking The warning vibration occurs earlier if: 193 Driving and parking 194 Driving systems If the lanes are very wide, it may not be possible to monitor the complete width of the neighboring lane. For this reason, vehicles in the next lane may not be detected, especially if they are driving in a staggered formation. This may be the case if vehicles are driving at that edge of their lane which is furthest away from your vehicle. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For this purpose, Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time. Two Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers respectively. An additional radar sensor is located behind the cover in the radiator grill. Make sure that the sensors and areas around them are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging cargo. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Indicator and warning display G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below 20 mph (30km/h). The indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles driving at the inner edge of their lanes. : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to Driving systems cause an accident and injure yourself and others. If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision. The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 20 mph(30 km/h) and120 mph(200 km/h). If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and the following is shown in the multifunction display, for example: Visual and audible collision warnings G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. In some cases, the course-correcting brake application is not sufficient to avoid a collision. In such a case, you must steer, brake or accelerate. In very rare cases, the system may erroneously detect a danger of collision in the area of crash barriers or similar lane borders and apply the brakes. Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. You are responsible for driving at appropriate speeds, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, There will be either no or only a weak coursecorrecting brake application if: Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle. Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the side. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake. RESP® is switched off. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected. Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that the radar sensor system (Y page 213) and Active Blind Spot Assist Z Driving and parking 20 mph(30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph(12 km/h). The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. In this event, Active Blind Spot Assist is no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. 195 Driving and parking 196 Driving systems (Y page 210) are activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. Active Lane Keeping Assist Important safety notes G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and may detect the lane markings on the road incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of a camera behind the top of the windshield. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane are present. is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun, or reflection from other vehicles. Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected. Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear, e.g. near roadworks. Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. Rthe road is narrow and winding. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always Rthere : Active Lane Keeping Assist camera If you select km on the on-board computer in the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function (Y page 211), Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. Warning vibration in the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe Ryou road has narrow lanes. cut the corner on a bend. Lane-correcting brake application G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. In some cases, the lanecorrecting brake application is not sufficient to bring your vehicle back to the original lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect road and traffic conditions. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. In rare cases, unclear markings or particular structures on the roadway can be recognized as solid lane markings. An inappropriate brake application, e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lane marking, may be interrupted at any time by steering slightly in the opposite direction. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take weather conditions into account. You are responsible for the driving at appropriate speeds, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. If you leave your lane under certain circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle back to the original lane. This function is available in the range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). A lane-correcting brake application can only be made after driving over a solid, recognizable lane marking. Before this, a warning must be given by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognized. The brake application also slightly reduces vehicle speed. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, the following, for example, appears in the multifunction display: i A further lane-correcting brake application can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane. No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ryou switch on the turn signals. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. RESP® is switched off. Rthe transmission is not in position D. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed. Z 197 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 198 Driving and parking Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic situations or road users. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you: Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction. a turn signal. Rclearly brake or accelerate. A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if: Ruse Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Rlane markings can no longer be recognized. Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive Adaptive(Y page 210). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, symbol : is shown in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. If Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Useful information ............................ Important safety notes .................... Displays and operation .................... Menus and submenus ...................... Display messages ............................. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................ 200 200 200 203 218 245 On-board computer and displays 199 On-board computer and displays 200 Displays and operation Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Important safety notes G WARNING The driver's concentration must always be directed primarily at road traffic. For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) per second. G WARNING No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative. As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such as Rspeed Routside temperature Rwarning/indicator lamps Rmalfunction/warning messages Rfailure of any systems Driving characteristics may be impaired. If you must continue to drive, do so with added caution. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center as soon as possible. G WARNING Malfunction and warning messages are only displayed for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain systems. They do not replace the owner's and/or driver's responsibility to maintain the vehicle's operating safety. Have all required maintenance services and safety checks performed on the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to address the malfunction and warning messages. G WARNING All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Failure to repair the condition noted may cause damage not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury. For an illustration of the instrument cluster, see (Y page 29). Displays and operation Instrument lighting The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the brightness control knob. The brightness control knob is located on the bottom left of the instrument cluster (Y page 29). X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise. If the light switch is set to Ã, T or L, the brightness is dependent upon the brightness of the ambient light. i The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated. Coolant temperature display G WARNING Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the left-hand side. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). ! A display message is shown if the coolant temperature is too high. If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Tachometer The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range. ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Outside temperature display The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 203). G WARNING The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Speedometer with segments The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. RCruise control activated (Y page 165): The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 167): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. Operating the on-board computer Overview The on-board computer is activated as soon as you turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using this could damage the engine. Z 201 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation On-board computer and displays 202 Displays and operation the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. 9 : Press and hold: a RConfirms : Multifunction display ; To switch on the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions = Right control panel ? Left control panel A Back button Left control panel = ; RCalls 9 : Press briefly: up the menu and menu bar RScrolls in lists RSelects a submenu or function RIn the Audio menu: selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous/next station or selects an audio track or a video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open a selection/display message RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialing the selected number RIn the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station Right control panel ~ RRejects or ends a call phone book/redial memory RExits 6 RMakes or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches W X RAdjusts 8 RMute the volume Back button % Press briefly: RBack RSwitches off the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions RHides display messages/calls up the last Trip menu function used RExits the telephone book/redial memory % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Multifunction display Values and settings as well as display messages are shown in the multifunction display. Menu bar ; disappears after a few seconds. Text field : shows the selected menu or submenu as well as display messages. i You can set the time using the audio system or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. The following messages may appear in the multifunction display: XjY Parking Guidance (Y page 184) CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 165) _ Adaptive high-beam Assist (Y page 114) À ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 188) ¤ ECO start/stop function (Y page 144) Ã Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 191) or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 196) ë HOLD function (Y page 178) Ä PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 68) Menus and submenus Menu overview Operating the on-board computer (Y page 201). Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus: RTrip Example: multifunction display for automatic transmission : Description field ; Menu bar = Drive program ? Time A Permanent display: outside temperature or speed (Y page 212) B Transmission position X To show the menu bar ;: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel. menu (Y page 204) menu (navigation details) (Y page 205) RAudio menu (Y page 206) RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 207) RDriveAssist menu (assistance) (Y page 209) RServ. menu (Y page 211) RSett. menu (Y page 211) RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 215) The Audio Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly in vehicles with an audio system and in vehicles with COMAND. The examples given RNavi Z 203 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 204 in this Operator's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND. RThe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. hours have been exceeded. R9,999 miles have been exceeded. The From Reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles. R999 Trip menu Standard display Displaying the range and current fuel consumption X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip odometer : and odometer ; is shown. Trip computer "From Start" or "From Reset" Example: trip computer "From Start" : Distance ; Time = Average speed Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the current fuel consumption and the approximate range (except for AMG vehicles). X The approximate range that can be covered depends on the fuel level and your current driving style. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being refueled C instead of the range. ECO display ? Average fuel consumption Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select From Start or From Reset. Reset X The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey, whilst the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 205). The From Start trip computer is automatically reset if: Example: ECO display Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO DISPLAY. DISPLAY X If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset. For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 161). Digital speedometer Navigation system menu Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. For more information, see the separate operating instructions. Switch on the audio system with Becker® MAP PILOT or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. X : Digital speedometer Route guidance not active Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer. X Resetting values : Direction of travel ; Current street Route guidance active No change of direction announced Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start" Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press the a button. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. X You can reset the values of the following functions: : Distance to the destination ; Distance to the next change of direction = Current street ? Symbol "follow the road's course" Rtrip odometer Start" trip computer R"From Reset" trip computer RECO display R"From Z 205 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 206 Menus and submenus Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation Other status indicators of the navigation system RO: you have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. Route... or Calculating Route: Route calculating a new route ROff Map or Off Mapped Road Road: the vehicle position is outside the area of the digital map (off-map position). RNo Route: Route no route could be calculated to the selected destination. RNew : Road into which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction icon When a change of direction has been announced, you will see visual distance display ; next to the symbol for change of direction =. This shortens from the bottom to the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation Audio menu Selecting a radio station i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio. For more information on satellite radio operation, see the separate operating instructions. i For information on switching waveband and storing stations; see the separate operating instructions. Switch on the audio system or COMAND and select Radio (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X : Road into which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = New lane during a change of direction ? Uninterrupted lane A Lane recommendation B Change-of-direction icon : Waveband On multilane roads, the system can display lane recommendation A for the next change of direction. During the change of direction, additional lanes may be displayed. Lane recommendations are only displayed if the relevant data is available on the digital map. ; Station frequency with memory position To select a stored station: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a station from the station list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. If no station list is received: X To select a station using the station search: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. X Video DVD operation Switch on COMAND and select video DVD; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X Operating audio player or audio media Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle. X Switch on the audio system or COMAND and select the audio player or medium; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. Display CD/DVD changer (example) : Current scene To select the next/previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired scene has been reached. X Telephone menu Introduction Display CD/DVD changer (example) : Current title To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired track has been reached. X If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this function. If track information is stored on the audio device or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and name of the track. The current track does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected). You can establish a Bluetooth® connection to the audio system or to COMAND (see the separate operating instructions). G WARNING The driver's attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the handsfree device and only use the telephone when road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. Z 207 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 208 Switch on the mobile phone and audio system or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RPhone READY or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RPhone No Service: Service there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network. Accepting a call If someone calls you when you are in the Tel menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display, for example: X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name. or To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the 9 or : button for longer than one second. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X To exit the telephone book: press the ~ or % button. X Redialing X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. You can accept a call even if you are not in the Tel menu. Rejecting or ending a call X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel. You can end or reject a call even if you are not in the Tel menu. Dialing a number from the phone book Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 9, : or a button to switch to the phone book. X The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If you do not want to make a call: press the ~ or % button. Assistance menu Introduction Deactivating/activating ESP® G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. In the DriveAssist menu, you have the following options: Rshow the distance display (Y page 209) Ractivate/deactivate ESP®(Y page 209) Ractivate/deactivate the PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 210) Ractivate/deactivate ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 210) Ractivate/deactivate Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 210) Ractivate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 210) Showing the distance display This function is only available with DISTRONIC PLUS. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Distance Display. Display X Press the a button. The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display (Y page 174) appears in the multifunction display. If the Sensors Deactivated message appears, the radar sensor system is deactivated. X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 213). Activating/deactivating ESP® on AMG vehicles (Y page 66). For further information about ESP®, see (Y page 64). X Start the engine. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ESP. ESP X Press the a button. X To deactivate: press a again. The å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To activate: press a again. The å warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 249). Observe the information on display messages (Y page 219). Rin Z 209 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 210 Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select PRE-SAFE Brake. Brake X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 68) is activated, the multifunction display shows the Ä symbol as long as the HOLD function is not activated (Y page 178). Vehicles with Parking Guidance: if PARKTRONIC is activated and you are driving at a speed below 22 mph(35 km/h), the j Parking Guidance symbol is shown instead of the Ä symbol. If the PRE-SAFE Brake: Sensors Deactivated message appears, the radar sensor system is deactivated. X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 213). For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake, see (Y page 68). Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Attention Assist. Assist X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. X When ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 188) is activated, the À symbol appears in the multifunction display when the ignition is on. For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 188). Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Blind Spot Asst. Asst X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. X If the Blind Spot Assist Sensors Deactivated or Act. Blind Spot Asst. Sensors Deactivated message appears, the radar sensor system is deactivated. X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 213). For further information about Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 189). For further information about Active Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 189). Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Lane Keep. Asst. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off Off, Standard or Adaptive Adaptive. X Press the a button to save the setting. X When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the Ã symbol appears in the multifunction display when the ignition is on. For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 191). For further information about Active Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 196). Service menu Rchange the convenience settings (Y page 214) Rrestore the factory settings (Y page 215) Instrument cluster Selecting the unit of measurement for distance The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunction display. You can determine whether the multifunction display shows some messages in miles or kilometers. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Inst. Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function. You will see the selected setting: km or miles. miles X Press the a button to save the setting. X In the Serv. menu, you have the following options: Rcalls up display messages (Y page 218) RRestart the tire pressure loss warning system (Canada only) (Y page 325) RCheck tire pressure electronically (Y page 326) RCall up when a service is due (Y page 286) Settings menu Introduction In the Sett. menu, you have the following options: Rchange the instrument cluster settings (Y page 211) Rchange the light settings (Y page 212) Rchange the vehicle settings (Y page 213) The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu and the trip odometer Rtrip computer Rcurrent consumption and the range Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi menu Rcruise control RDISTRONIC PLUS RASSYST PLUS service interval display Rodometer Z 211 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 212 Selecting the permanent display function You can determine whether the multifunction display permanently shows your speed or the outside temperature. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Inst. Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Permanent Display: function. You will see the selected setting Outside Temperature or Speedometer [km/h] (USA)/Speedometer Speedometer [mph] (Canada). X Press the a button to save the setting. X i The speed is shown in km/h (USA)/mph (Canada). Lights Switching the daytime running lamps on/ off i This function is not available in Canada. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Day Lights function. If the Day Lights function has been switched on, the cone of light and the W symbol in the multifunction display are shown in red. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Further information on daytime running lamps (Y page 111). Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/ off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Adapt. Highbeam function. If the Adapt. Highbeam function has been switched on, the cone of light and the _ symbol in the upper multifunction display are shown in red. X Press the a button to save the setting. For further information about Adaptive Highbeam Assist, see (Y page 114). Activating/deactivating surround lighting and exterior lighting delayed switch-off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Surround Lighting function. When the Surround Lighting function is activated, the light cone and the area around the vehicle are displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting temporarily: Before leaving the vehicle, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is deactivated. X Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is reactivated the next time you start the engine. If you have activated the Surround Lighting function and the light switch is set to Ã, the following functions are activated when it is dark: Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking with the SmartKey. If you start the engine, the surround lighting is switched off and automatic headlamp mode is activated (Y page 111). Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds after the engine is switched off. If you close all the doors and the trunk lid, the exterior lighting goes off after 5 seconds. i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, when the surround lighting and delayed switch-off exterior lighting are on, the following light up: RParking lamps RFront fog lamps RLow-beam headlamps RDaytime running lamps RSide marker lamps RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off If you activate the Light. Delay function, the interior lighting remains on for 20 seconds after you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light. Delay function. When the Light. Delay function is activated, the vehicle interior is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Vehicle Activating/deactivating the automatic door locking mechanism X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. Door Locks function. When the Auto. Door Locks function is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. If you activate the Auto. Door Locks function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h). For further information on the automatic locking feature, see (Y page 82). Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Acoustic Lock function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol in the multifunction display lights up red. X Press the a button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the radar sensor system X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. Z 213 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 214 Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):. Manual): You will see the selected setting: Enabled or Disabled Disabled. X Press the a button to save the setting. X The following systems are switched off when the radar sensor system is deactivated: RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 167) PLUS (Y page 63) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 68) RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 193) RBAS Convenience Activating/deactivating the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature G WARNING You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. To stop steering wheel movement, move steering wheel adjustment lever or press one of the memory position buttons. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver's door and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Easy Entry/Exit: function. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 102). Switching the belt adjustment on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Belt Adjustment function. When the Belt Adjustment function is activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. For further information on belt adjustment, see (Y page 54). Switching the fold-in mirrors when locking feature on/off This function is only available on vehicles with the memory function (Y page 106). This function is only available in Canada. When you activate the Auto. Mirror Folding function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the exterior mirrors fold out again. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. Mirror Folding function. If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. If you have switched the Auto. Mirror Folding function on and you fold the exterior mirrors in using the button on the door (Y page 104), they will not fold out automatically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. Restoring the factory settings Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory Setting submenu. X Press a to confirm. The Reset All Settings? message appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes Yes. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. X Upshift indicator UP = fades out other messages until you have shifted up. If the engine oil temperature is below 176 ‡ (80 †) the oil temperature is shown in blue. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time. SETUP SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) mode and the SPORT handling mode. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until SETUP is displayed. For safety reasons, the Day Lights function in the Lights submenu is only reset if the vehicle is stationary. AMG menu in AMG vehicles AMG displays X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. : Drive program (C C/SS+ SS+/M M) ; ESP® mode (ON ON/OFF OFF) or SPORT handling mode (SPORT SPORT) RACETIMER Displaying and starting RACETIMER G WARNING : Digital speedometer ; Gear indicator = Upshift indicator ? Engine oil temperature A Coolant temperature Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual gearshift program. The RACETIMER feature is only for use on roads and in conditions where high speed driving is permitted. Racing on public roads is prohibited under all circumstances. The driver is and must always remain responsible for following posted speed limits. You can use the RACETIMER to store lap times. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the RACETIMER is shown. Z 215 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 216 i If the RACETIMER is selected, the = and ; buttons cannot be used to call up the menu bar. i It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with Finish Lap. Lap Stopping the RACETIMER X Press the % button on the steering wheel. : Lap ; RACETIMER You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To start: press the a button to start the RACETIMER. Displaying the intermediate time X Press a to confirm Yes Yes. The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the SmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then press a to confirm Start Start, timing is continued. Resetting the current lap X Stop the RACETIMER. X Press the = or ; button to select Reset Lap. Lap X Press a to reset the lap time to "0". Press the = or ; button to select Interm. Time. Time X Press a to confirm. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. X Starting a new lap X Press a to confirm New Lap. Lap : RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) = Lap Deleting all laps If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted. You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset. X Reset the current lap. X Press a to confirm Reset Reset. Reset Race-Timer? appears in the multifunction display. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted. Overall statistics This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation is shown. X : Lap ; Lap time = Average lap speed ? Lap length A Top speed during lap X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. : RACETIMER overall evaluation ; Total time driven = Average speed ? Distance covered A Maximum speed Lap statistics This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. X Z 217 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Display messages On-board computer and displays 218 Display messages General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function (Y page 178) and parking (Y page 158). Hiding display messages X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. Message memory The message memory allows you to call up previous display messages. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, Messages for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages. Messages X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. X Safety systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes are: Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual RSelf-diagnosis RThe is not yet complete. on-board voltage may be insufficient. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. Z 219 On-board computer and displays Display messages 220 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X T! ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRESAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. F(USA only)J(Canada only) Release Parking Brake You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also sounds. X Release the parking brake. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $(USA only)J(Canada A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is active. A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. You cannot start the engine. X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disappears. X Use the folding wheel chock (Y page 303), from the vehicle tool kit to secure the vehicle against rolling away. You can restart the engine. $(USA only)J(Canada There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. only) Brake Immediately only) Check Brake Fluid Level # Check Brake Pad Wear G G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction. The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. mbrace Inoperative One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning. X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 221 On-board computer and displays Display messages 222 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions PRE-SAFE Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rthe Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper (Y page 295). X Restart the engine. X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 66). X PRE-SAFE Functions Limited See Operator's Manual PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS or the distance warning signal may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. SRS Malfunction Service Required G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System, see (Y page 39). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Front Left Malfunction Service RequiredorFront Required Front Right Malfunction Service Required 6 Rear Left Malfunction Service Required or Rear Right Malfunction Service Required 6 G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Rear Center Malfunction Service Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required or Right Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required G WARNING The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 223 On-board computer and displays Display messages 224 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even though: Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat. or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied. The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat. G WARNING The air bag may deploy unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat. X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the 45 indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe 45 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 45). Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual display message must not be shown in the multifunction display. X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the 45 indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 45). Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey, even though: Ran adult or Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the frontpassenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is. G WARNING The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the 45 indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe 45 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 45). Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual display message must not be shown in the multifunction display. X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. Z 225 On-board computer and displays Display messages 226 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the 45 indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 45). Lights i Display messages about LEDs: This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Left Cornering Light or Check Right Cornering Light b Check Left Low Beam or Check Right Low Beam b Check Rear Left Turn Signal or Check Rear Right Turn Signal b Check Front Left Turn Signal or Check Front Right Turn Signal The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Left Mirror Turn Signal or Check Right Mirror Turn Signal b Check Center Brake Lamp b Check Left Tail and Brake LampsorCheck Lamps Check Right Tail and Brake Lamps b Check Left High BeamorCheck Beam Check Right High Beam b Check Left Fog Lamp or Check Right Fog Lamp b Rear Fog Lamp The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand high beam is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear fog lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 227 On-board computer and displays Display messages 228 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Front Left Parking Lamp or Check Front Right Parking Lamp b Check Left Reverse Lamp or Check Right Reverse Lamp b Check Front Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front Right Sidemarker Lamp b Check Rear Sidemarker Check Rear Sidemarker Left Lamp or Right Lamp b Check Left Daytime Running Light or Check Right Daytime Running Light b Active Headlamps Inoperative b Malfunction See Operator's Manual The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right front side marker lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The active light function is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The exterior lighting is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The exterior lighting is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunction See Operator's Manual b Auto Lamp Function Inoperative b Switch Off Lights The light sensor is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to Ã. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: 229 On-board computer and displays Display messages Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windshield. Rvisibility If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Z On-board computer and displays 230 Display messages Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine ? The fan motor is faulty. X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 290). X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X G WARNING Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X Open the hood. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. Ra If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 4 Check Eng. Oil Lev. When Next Refueling The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 289). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 289). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual. ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// www.mbusa.com (USA only). Z 231 On-board computer and displays Display messages 232 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low. X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest Check Engine Oil (Y page 289). Level (Add 1 quart) X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 289). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual. ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// www.mbusa.com (USA only). 8 Fuel Level Low The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station. C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail. 8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. Gas Cap Loose If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. Attention Assist: Take a Break! During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. À Attention Assist Inoperative ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ë The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 178). Off The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 178). Radar Sensors Deactivated See Operator's Manual The radar sensor system is deactivated. X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 213). Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual or Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rvisibility Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X Clean the windshield. X Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative or Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 233 On-board computer and displays Display messages 234 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual or Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe sensors are dirty. is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rfunction Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X Clean the sensors (Y page 295). X Restart the engine. X Blind Spot Assist Inoperative or Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Guidance Inoperative Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 184). X Restart the engine. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Parking Guidance Canceled Parking Guidance is deactivated. Possible causes are: Rthe vehicle is skidding. sensors are dirty. Ra malfunction has occurred. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 184). Rthe If the parking space symbol does not appear in the multifunction display at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h): X Clean the sensors (Y page 295). X Restart the engine. If the parking space symbol still does not appear in the multifunction display at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h): X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longer following the recommended path. X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messages in the multifunction display. Parking Guidance Finished The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 167). If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS Now Available DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 167). Z 235 On-board computer and displays Display messages 236 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. RThe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. DISTRONIC is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rthe Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper (Y page 295). X Restart the engine. X DISTRONIC PLUS Inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS Passive You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS --- mph An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 167). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Cruise Control Inoperative Cruise control is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise Control --- mph A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled. You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 165). Z 237 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 238 Display messages Tires Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tire Pressure Soon The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 301). X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (Y page 325). Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. Then Restart Run Flat Indicator X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 325). Run Flat Indicator Inoperative The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Tire pressures will be displayed after driving a few minutes The tire pressure monitor is measuring the tire pressure. X Drive on. The tire pressures appear in the multifunction display after you have been driving for a few minutes. Tire Press. Monitor The tire pressure monitor is faulty. Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 301). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 326). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Warning Tire Malfunction The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards: RA flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. could lose control of the vehicle. RContinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 301). RYou Z 239 On-board computer and displays Display messages 240 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Correct Tire Pressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 326). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 329). TirePress. Sensor(s)Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tire Press. Monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily Currently malfunctioning. Unavailable X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been solved. h Tire Pressure Warning Tire Malfunction The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards: RA flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. could lose control of the vehicle. RContinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 301). RYou Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. Check Tire Pressure G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 301). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 326). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. h Correct Tire Pressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 326). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Shift to 'P' or 'N' You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. to Start Engine X Shift the transmission to position P or N. P Shift to 'P' You have attempted to stop the engine with the Start/Stop button while the transmission was not in position P. X Shift the transmission to position P. Z 241 On-board computer and displays Display messages 242 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions While the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is active, you have: Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or off the engine or Ropened the hood A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. You cannot start the engine. X Shift the transmission to position P. You can restart the engine. Rswitched N The trunk lid is open. X Close the trunk lid. M The hood is open. G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X Close the hood. C At least one door is open. X Close all the doors. _ The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right-hand side. X Push the backrest back until it engages. Rear Left Backrest Not Latched or Rear Right Backrest Not Latched Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. Power Steering Malfunction See Operator's Manual G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Add washer fluid (Y page 290). Check Washer Fluid SmartKey Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Â You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Use the correct SmartKey. Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle Â Remove Key Â Obtain a New Key Â Replace Key Battery The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. X Remove the SmartKey. The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 77). Z 243 On-board computer and displays Display messages 244 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Â The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and is only a reminder. You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock. X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you leave the vehicle. Don't Forget Your Key Â Key Not Detected (red display message) The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). (Y page 158). X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key. The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Â Key Not Detected (white display message) The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present. X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO functions in the vehicle. If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected: X Â Key Detected in Vehicle Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during locking. X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Â Remove 'Start' Button and Insert Key The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected. KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Â At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again. Close Doors to Lock Vehicle Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Seat belts Problem 245 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. After starting the engine, the red seat X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 54). belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds. ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened. After starting the X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 54). engine, the red seat The warning tone ceases. belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to six seconds. ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The red seat belt X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 54). warning lamp lights up The warning lamp goes out. after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's There are objects on the front-passenger seat. or the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow door is closed. them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. Z 246 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The car is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 54). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The car is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Safety systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. J (Canada only) G WARNING The red brake system The braking effect may be impaired. warning lamp comes on There is a risk of an accident. while the engine is running. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving also sounds. under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X Do not add brake fluid. Topping up will not remedy the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available. Z 247 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 248 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for example. Possible causes are: RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete. on-board voltage may be insufficient. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. RThe G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist are also unavailable, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. $ (USA only) J (Canada only) ÷å! The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are not available either. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 249 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 250 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ä ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. For exceptions, see: (Y page 64). The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. å ESP® is deactivated. ESP® The yellow OFF G WARNING warning lamp is lit while ® ® the engine is running. If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Reactivate ESP®. For exceptions, see: (Y page 64). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. M AMG vehicles only: The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. SPORT handling mode is activated. G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions written in the "Activating/deactivating SPORT handling mode" section (Y page 66). Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷äå ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ÷å ESP® The yellow and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Z 251 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 252 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $ (USA only) You are driving with the parking brake applied. X Release the parking brake. J (Canada only) The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. The red brake system warning lamp comes on while the vehicle is moving. A warning tone also sounds. 6 The red SRS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Drive on carefully. X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System, see (Y page 39). Engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. There may be a malfunction, for example: Rin the engine management the fuel injection system Rin the exhaust system Rin the ignition system Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Rin i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving. 8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed The yellow reserve fuel correctly or the fuel system is leaking. warning lamp flashes X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction while the vehicle is in display. motion. In addition, X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. the ; Check Engine X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler warning lamp may light cap. up. X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop. 8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest gas station. warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Z 253 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 254 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is defective. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Allow the engine and coolant to cool. X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 290). Observe the warning notes. X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Allow the engine and coolant to cool. X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 290). Observe the warning notes. X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the next qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. Z 255 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 256 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster G WARNING Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. ! If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡ (120 †), do not continue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Driving systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · G WARNING The red distance You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line warning lamp lights up of travel at too high a speed. while the vehicle is in There is a risk of an accident. motion. A warning tone X Be prepared to brake immediately. also sounds. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. More information about DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 167) and PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 68). Tires Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h USA only: The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) is lit. Canada only: The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss) is lit. The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires. h USA only: The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 301). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 326). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 257 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 258 259 260 260 260 265 Stowage and features Useful information ............................ Loading guidelines ............................ Stowage areas .................................. Features ............................................. 260 Stowage areas Useful information Stowage and features i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Loading guidelines G WARNING Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible using fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when transporting cargo. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backrests. The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. Do not place anything on the rearwindow shelf. Never drive a vehicle with the trunk open. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the gross axle weight rating of the vehicle (including occupants). The values are specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door. Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the trunk as possible. Rthe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. Ralways place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into place. Ralways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edges for protection. Stowage areas Stowage space Important safety notes G WARNING To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backrests. Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during Rbraking Rvehicle Ran maneuvers accident Stowage areas 261 Stowage compartments in the front X To open: pull handle : and open glove box flap ;. X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until it engages. X To open: pull down eyeglasses compartment : by the handle. Stowage compartment under the armrest The glove box can only be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key. X To open: press left-hand button ; or righthand button :. The stowage compartment opens. i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a To lock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2. X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise to position 1. X USB connection and an AUX IN connection or a Media Interface are installed in the stowage compartment. A Media Interface is a universal interface for mobile audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player (see the separate COMAND Operating Instructions). i The glove box can be cooled (Y page 136). Eyeglasses compartment There is a compartment to stow eyeglasses in the headliner on the driver's side. Z Stowage and features Glove box Stowage areas 262 Stowage and features Stowage compartment under the front seats storage bag. In an accident, during hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants. Storage bags cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident. The stowage pockets are on the back of the driver's and front-passenger's seats. Stowage net X To open: pull handle : up and fold cover ; forwards. Stowage space in the rear Stowage compartment in the rear ! Do not sit or lean your bodyweight on the armrests when they are folded out as you could damage them. ! Close the cover of the stowage compartment before folding the rear seat armrest back into the seat backrest. G WARNING Parcel nets are intended for storing lightweight items only, such as road maps, mail, etc. Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or fragile objects may not be transported in the parcel nets. In an accident, during hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants. Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident. Stowage nets are located in the frontpassenger footwell and on the left-hand side of the trunk. Rear bench seat through-loading feature Important safety notes X X To open: fold down seat armrest ;. Fold cover : of the armrest upwards. Stowage pockets G WARNING Storage bags are intended for storing lightweight items only. Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or fragile objects may not be transported in the G WARNING When expanding the cargo volume, always fold the seat backrests fully forward. Unless you are transporting cargo, the seat backrests must remain properly locked in the upright position. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. Stowage areas Always use the cargo tie-down rings. 263 Folding the seat backrest back The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded down separately to increase the trunk capacity. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. ! Make sure that the seat belt does not Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Open the trunk. X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrest release handle :. The corresponding rear seat backrest is released. X Fully insert the rear seat backrest head restraints. become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. X Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it engages. G WARNING Always lock the seat backrest in its upright position when the rear seat bench is occupied, or the extended cargo volume is not in use. Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the seat backrest. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when transporting cargo. i You should always engage the rear seat backrests if you do not need the throughloading feature. This will prevent unauthorized access to the trunk from the vehicle interior. Z Stowage and features Folding the seat backrest forward Stowage areas 264 Adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 98). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X Stowage and features Securing cargo Cargo tie-down rings Observe the following notes on securing loads: Rsecure : Bag hook the load using the cargo tie-down rings. not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. Rdo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners. Rpad sharp edges for protection. There are four cargo tie down rings in the trunk. Rdo Stowage well under the trunk floor The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage compartment. X To open: pull handle : up. X Hook handle : into rain trough ;. Vehicle with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat : Cargo tie-down rings Bag hook ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 11lbs (5kg) and should not be used to secure a load. ! Unhook the handle before again before closing the trunk lid and clip it in securely to prevent the handle flap from protruding. Otherwise, you could damage the handle. Features Roof carrier 265 Attaching the roof carrier Important safety notes Only use roof racks approved by MercedesBenz for your vehicle model to avoid damage to the vehicle. Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions. Otherwise, an improperly attached roof rack system or its load could become detached from the vehicle. Do not exceed the maximum roof load of 220 lb (100 kg). Take into consideration that when the roof rack is loaded, the handling characteristics are different from those when operating the vehicle without the roof rack loaded. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof carrier is installed you can: Rraise the sliding sunroof fully the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel fully Ropen the trunk lid fully Ropen ! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers, do not use metallic or hard objects to open them. Open covers : carefully in the direction of the arrow. X Fold covers : upwards. X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Features Cup holders Important safety notes G WARNING In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment, only use containers that fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may cause serious personal injury. Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. When not in use, keep the cup holder closed. An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup holder may come loose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be Z Stowage and features G WARNING Features 266 thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Stowage and features Cup holder in the front-compartment center console Swing the rear seat armrest cover back down, if necessary. X To close: raise the rear seat armrest cover. Swing cup holder ; back until it engages. X Sun visors Overview of sun visors G WARNING Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors closed while the vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare can endanger you and others. : Cup holders Cup holder in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged. : Mirror light ; Bracket = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket ? Vanity mirror A Mirror cover Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. Fold down the rear seat armrest. X To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover. X Press release catch :. Cup holder ; folds out forwards. X Glare from the side Fold down the sun visor. Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Swing the sun visor to the side. X X Features 267 Rear window roller sunblind (Sedan) Important safety notes X Pull or push the sun visor in the direction of the arrow. Roller sunblinds on the rear side windows ! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Do not let it snap back suddenly as this would damage the automatic roller mechanism. ! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sunblind hooked in and the side windows opened simultaneously. The roller sunblind can jump out of the retainers and spring back suddenly when driving at high speeds, e.g. when driving on the freeway. This could damage the inertia reel. Therefore, either close the side window or retract the roller sunblind before driving at high speeds. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. The children could: Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with vehicle equipment that can be operated even if the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, such as seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment, or the memory function If children open a door, they could injure other persons or get out of the vehicle and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and the child could be burned on these parts. Rbe G WARNING When adjusting a roller sunblind, the roller blind moves up or down. You might become trapped in the process. In the event of danger, briefly press the button for the roller sunblind to change the roller blind's direction of movement. X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the top of the window. Extending/retracting the roller sunblind ! Make sure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or other objects could be damaged. Z Stowage and features G WARNING Features 268 To re-install the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. X To close: briefly press cover : at the front. The cover moves back. X Stowage and features Rear-compartment ashtray Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 141). X To extend or retract: briefly press button :. The roller sunblind fully extends or fully retracts. X Ashtray Front ashtray ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged. i You can remove the ashtray insert and use the resulting compartment for stowage. To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge. To remove the insert: press release button = and lift the insert up and out. X To install the insert: install insert : from above into the holder and press down into the holder until it engages. X X Cigarette lighter G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. The children could: Rinjure To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X To remove the insert: hold insert = by the ribbing at the sides and lift it up ; and out. X themselves on parts of the vehicle seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with vehicle equipment that can be operated even if the SmartKey is removed from the Rbe Features G WARNING Never touch the heating element or sides of the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the knob only. Make sure any children traveling with you do not injure themselves or start a fire with the hot cigarette lighter. 12 V sockets General notes The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as lamps or chargers for mobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 141). i An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. Socket in the rear-compartment center console Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 141). X To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X To close: briefly press cover : at the front. The cover moves back. X X X Pull cover ; out by its top edge. Lift up the cover of socket :. 115 V socket G WARNING The 115 V AC power socket operates on high voltage. Use the 115 V AC power socket in the vehicle with the same caution and care that you would take with power sockets at home. Keep fluids away from the 115 V AC power socket. Do not use liquids or sharp Z Stowage and features ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, such as seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment, or the memory function If children open a door, they could injure other persons or get out of the vehicle and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and the child could be burned on these parts. 269 270 Features tools to clean the power socket. Keep the cover of the 115 V AC power socket closed when not in use. Otherwise, you could suffer an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured. Stowage and features G WARNING Any device that you connect must have a suitable plug and meet U.S. standards. Never pull at a cable to disconnect a plug from a 115 V AC power socket. Never use a damaged connection cable. The 115 V AC power socket must never be connected to another 115 V AC power source. Do not use a converter with an earthed plug for the 115 V AC power socket. This could cause serious injury to you and/or other people. G WARNING If the 115 V AC power socket is damaged or pulled out of the trim, do not use or touch the 115 V AC power socket. The use of a 115 V AC power socket that has been damaged or pulled out of the trim could cause serious injury to you or others. 115 V power socket : provides an alternating voltage of 115 V so that small electronic devices can be connected. These devices, such as games consoles, chargers and laptops, should not consume more than a maximum of 150 W altogether. Requirements for operation of these devices: Rthe plug of the electronic device is plugged into 115 V power socket :. maximum wattage of the device to be connected must not exceed 150 W. Rthe on-board power supply is within a permissible voltage range. Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartment are operational (Y page 269). X Open flap =. X Switch on the ignition. X Insert the plug of the electronic device into 115 V power socket :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If indicator lamp ; does not light up, read more in the section on malfunctions. Rthe X To turn off: disconnect the plug from 115 V power socket :. Ensure that you do not pull on the cord. Possible causes of malfunctions: Rthe on-board power supply is not within a permissible voltage range. Rthe temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high. Rsome small electronic devices have a constant nominal power of less than 150 W, but a very high switch-on current. These devices will not work. If you connect such a device, 115 V power socket : will not supply it with power. If indicator lamp ; still does not light up, contact a qualified specialist workshop. mbrace Important safety notes ! A license agreement must exist in order to activate the mbrace service. Ensure that your system is activated and ready for use, and press the ï MB Info call button to register. If any of the steps mentioned is Features RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center under 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service (Canada: TELEAID), a user ID and password will be sent to you by post. USA only: you can use this password to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. The mbrace system is available if: Rit has been activated and is operational corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Customer Center Ra service subscription is available Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged Rthe i Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if: RGPS reception is available vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center Rthe The mbrace system To adjust the volume during an mbrace call, proceed as follows: X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Use the volume controller of the audio system/COMAND. The mbrace system provides various services, e.g.: Rautomatic and manual emergency call Assistance call RMB Info call USA only: you can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. RRoadside System self-test After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis. A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following conditions occurs: Rthe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test. Rthe indicator lamp in the F Roadside Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. Rthe indicator lamp in the ï MB-Info call button does not light up during selfdiagnosis of the system. Rthe indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red after the system self-diagnosis: - SOS button - Roadside Assistance call button F - MB Info call button ï RThe mbrace Inoperative or mbrace Service Not Activated message appears in the multifunction display after the system self-diagnosis. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, assistance must be summoned by other means. Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the following service hotlines: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance center at Z Stowage and features not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone assistance services: 271 272 Features 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 Emergency call Stowage and features Important safety notes G WARNING If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing continuously and no voice connection with the Response center has been established, then the mbrace system has not been able to initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant mobile phone network is not available). The Call Failed message is displayed in the multifunction display and must be confirmed. Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means. ! A license agreement must exist in order to activate the mbrace service. Ensure that your system is activated and ready for use, and press the ï MB Info call button to register. If any of the steps mentioned is not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone assistance services: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center under 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. i You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself. An emergency call can also be initiated manually. As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The Connecting Call message appears on the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system) Rvehicle identification number Rinformation on serious accidents Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. If the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency. i If there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle. Making an emergency call G WARNING If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the SOS button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle's approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occupants. Features 273 If a cellular phone network is available and there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent Rvehicle location of the vehicle identification number To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover : briefly to open. X Press SOS button ; briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded. X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. X After the emergency call, close cover :. X Roadside Assistance button COMAND shows that an mbrace call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. From the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance center can ascertain the nature of the problem (Y page 276). The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified MercedesBenz technician or organizes for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. Further details are available in your mbrace manual. i The mbrace system failed to initiate a Roadside Assistance call if: Rthe X Press Roadside Assistance button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button : flashes while the call is active. The Connecting Call message appears on the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance call button : is flashing continuously Rno voice connection to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center was established This may be because the corresponding mobile phone network is not available. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. If a connection can be made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. Z Stowage and features i The display of the audio system or Features 274 X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding button for ending a phone call on the audio system or on COMAND. Stowage and features MB Info call button Center and the vehicle occupants. You can obtain information on how to operate your vehicle's systems, on the location of the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, and on further products and services offered by Mercedes-Benz USA. USA only: you can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. i The mbrace system failed to initiate an MB Info call if: Rthe X Press MB Info call button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while the connection is being made. The Connecting Call message appears on the multifunction display. The audio system is muted. If a connection can be made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. If a cellular phone network is available and there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent Rvehicle location of the vehicle identification number i The display of the audio system or COMAND shows that an mbrace call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance indicator lamp in MB Info call button : is flashing continuously Rno voice connection to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center was established This may be because the corresponding mobile phone network is not available. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding button for ending a phone call on the audio system or on COMAND. Call priority When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended. An emergency call can only be terminated by the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. All other calls can be ended by pressing: Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel Rthe corresponding button on the audio system or on COMAND to end the voice call Features is muted. The mobile phone is no longer connected to COMAND. However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location. Downloading destinations in COMAND Downloading destinations Downloading destinations gives you access to a data bank with over 15 million Points of Interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navigation system in your vehicle. If you know the destination, the address can be downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the location of Points of Interest (POIs)/ important destinations in the vicinity. Furthermore, you can download routes with up to 20 way points. You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered. The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered. i If you select No No, the address can be stored in the address book. i The Destination Download function is available if the corresponding mobile phone network is available and data transfer is possible. i You can only use the Destination Download function if the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system. Route Assistance This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package and cannot be purchased separately. i You can also use the Route Assistance function if your vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system. Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave your vehicle. The customer service representative finds a suitable route depending on your vehicle's current position and the desired destination. You will then be guided live through the current route section. Search & Send "Search & Send" is a destination entry service. You can find further information on "Search & Send" in the separate COMAND operating instructions. Vehicle remote opening You can use the vehicle remote opening if you have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a replacement SmartKey is not available. The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance center. The vehicle can be immediately remotely opened within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote opening may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle can no longer be opened remotely. X Contact the following service hotlines: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 You will be asked for your password. X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®, Blackberry) Z Stowage and features i If an mbrace call is initiated, audio output 275 276 Features To do this, you will need your identification number and password. i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if the corresponding mobile phone network is accessible. Stowage and features Vehicle remote closing The remote closing feature can be used when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance center. The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote closing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle can no longer be closed remotely. X Contact the following service hotlines: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 You will be asked for your PIN. The next time you are inside the vehicle and you switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked Remotely message appears in the multifunction display. USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®, Blackberry) To do this, you will need your identification number and password. i The vehicle remote closing feature is available when the relevant mobile phone network is available and data connection is possible. Stolen vehicle recovery service If your vehicle has been stolen: Notify the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report. X This number will be forwarded to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center together with your PIN. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center then attempts to locate the mbrace system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle is located. However, only the law enforcement agency is informed of the location of the vehicle. X i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for longer than 30 seconds, the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance center is automatically informed. Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis With the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), the Customer Assistance center can provide improved support for problems with your vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Customer Assistance center. The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what kind of assistance is required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest MercedesBenz Service center or a recovery vehicle is called. If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is initiated by the Customer Assistance center. You will see the Roadside Assistance Connected message in the COMAND display. If the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis is able to be started, the Request for vehicle diagnosis received. Start vehicle diagnosis? message appears in the display. Press Yes to confirm the message. X If the Vehicle Diagnosis: Please switch on ignition. message appears: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X If the Please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. message appears: follow the instructions of the customer service representative. The message in the display disappears. If you select Cancel Cancel, the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis is canceled completely. The vehicle operating state check begins. Meanwhile, the Vehicle diagnosis activated message appears. X When the check is finished, the Sending vehicle diagnosis data...(Voice connection may be interrupted during data transfer.) message appears. The vehicle data can now be sent to the Customer Assistance center. X Press OK to confirm the message. The voice connection with the Customer Assistance center is terminated. The Vehicle Diagnosis: Transferring data... appears. The vehicle data is sent to the Customer Assistance center. Depending on what the customer service representative agreed with you, the voice connection is re-established after the transfer is complete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a later time by another means, e.g. by E-Mail or telephone. Further functions of the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis include, for example: Rtransfer of service data to the Customer Assistance center. If a service is overdue, the COMAND display shows a message about various special offers at your workshop. Rmonthly status information E-Mail on oil level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes, etc. If applicable, you will receive information on special offers in the E-Mail. USA only: this information can also be called up under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com. Information on the data stored in the vehicle (Y page 26). Information on roadside assistance (Y page 23). Downloading routes Downloading routes allows you to transfer and save predefined routes in the navigation system. To do this, an SD memory card must be inserted into the COMAND system. If no SD memory card is inserted, you must insert the card into the card slot on the COMAND system before saving. A route can be prepared and sent either by a customer service representative or via the mbrace portal on the Internet. Each route can include up to 20 way points. When a route has been received by the navigation system, 'Route name' has been saved to memory card. Do you want to start route guidance? appears on the COMAND display. The route is saved to the SD memory card. X To start route guidance: select Yes Yes. An overview of the route is shown in the display. i If you select No No, the saved route can be called up later in the navigation menu. X Select Start Start. Route guidance is started. i Downloaded and saved data can be called up again in COMAND. Further information can be found in the "COMAND", "Online and Internet services" and "Download destination/route" sections. Z 277 Stowage and features Features Stowage and features 278 Features Speed alert Triggering the vehicle alarm You can define the upper speed limit, which must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a message will be sent to the Customer Assistance center. The Customer Assistance center then forwards this information to you. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include SMS, E-Mail or an automated call. The data which is sent to the Customer Assistance center contains the following information: With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's panic alarm via SMS. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off. Rthe location where the speed limit was exceeded Rthe time at which the speed limit was exceeded Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded Geo fencing Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries of the selected areas. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include SMS, E-Mail or an automated call. The area can be determined as either a circle or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Different settings are possible for each area. USA only: these settings can be called up under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com. Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and inform the customer service representative that you wish to activate geo fencing. Currently inactive areas can be activated by SMS. Garage door opener Important safety notes G WARNING Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming a garage door opener, the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or closes. Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. When programming a garage door opener, park vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming the integrated remote control. Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Features incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programming the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes RCanada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of charge) More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com. Programming the integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror Programming buttons G WARNING Only press the button on the integrated garage door opener if there are no persons or objects present within the sweep of the garage door. Persons could otherwise be injured as the door moves. i USA only: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 i Canada only: This device complies with the RSS-210 Rules of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. IC: 279B-HMIHL4 Integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror Garage door remote control A is not part of the integrated garage door opener. X Before programming for the first time, clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener (Y page 281). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. i Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as button ;, = or ? is programmed for the first time. If the selected button has already been programmed, indicator lamp : will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed. Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X Point garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view X Z Stowage and features i Certain garage door drives are 279 Features Stowage and features 280 mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm). i The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Press and hold button B on remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. If indicator lamp : lights up green or flashes, then programming has been successful. X Release button B on remote control A for the garage door drive system. X If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programming procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rearview mirror. X i If the indicator lamp flashes green after successful programming, the garage door system is using a rolling code. After programming, you must synchronize the garage door opener integrated in the rearview mirror with the receiver of the garage door system. Synchronizing the rolling code Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. Observe the safety notes when performing the rolling code synchronization (Y page 278). Observe the safety notes when performing the rolling code synchronization. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the programming button of the door or gate drive (see the door or gate drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming of additional remote controls"). i Usually, you now have 30seconds to initiate the next step. X Press previously programmed button ;, = or ? of the integrated garage door opener until the door closes. The rolling code synchronization is then complete. Notes on programming the remote control Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not recognized during programming. Comparable with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers are designed to "time-out" in the same manner. Proceed as follows: Rif you live in Canada you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programming steps X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Release the button. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X Press button B of garage door remote control A for two seconds, then release it for two seconds. X Press button B again for two seconds. Rif Features Repeat this sequence on button B of remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. If indicator lamp : turns red, repeat the process. X Continue with the other programming steps (see above). out). Press button B on remote control A again before transmission ends. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. Problems when programming If you are experiencing problems programming the integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instructions: After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage door drive remote control A. This can usually be found on the back of the remote control. The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units which operate in the frequency range of 280to 433MHz. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. RWhen programming, hold remote control A at varying distances and angles from the button that you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 2and 12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf another remote control for the same garage door drive is available, repeat the same programming steps with this remote control. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control A. RNote that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes Opening/closing the garage door i The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary. Clearing the memory of the integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp lights up yellow. X Press and hold buttons ; and ? until the indicator lamp turns green. X i Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. Z Stowage and features X 281 Features 282 Compass Calling up the compass Stowage and features The compass displays in which compass direction the vehicle is currently traveling: N, NE, E, SE NE SE, S, SW SW, W or NW NW. South America zone map To receive a correct display in rear-view mirror :, the compass must be calibrated and the magnetic field zone set. Setting the compass X Determine your position using the following zone maps. Push a round pen into opening =(Y page 282) for approximately three seconds. The zone currently selected appears in compass display ;(Y page 282). X To select the zone: push a round pen into opening =(Y page 282) until the desired zone is selected. If, after a few seconds, the display in compass display ;(Y page 282) changes direction, the zone has been selected. X Calibrating the compass Make sure that there is sufficient space for you to drive in a circle without impeding traffic. In order to calibrate the compass correctly, do the following: X Rcalibrate North America zone map the compass in the open and not in the vicinity of steel structures or highvoltage transmission lines. Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the climate control, windshield wipers or rear window defroster. Rclose all doors and the trunk lid. X Switch on the ignition. X Push a round pen into opening =(Y page 282) for approximately six Features 283 Stowage and features seconds, until symbol C is shown in compass display ;(Y page 282). X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph (10 km/h). When the calibration has successfully been completed, the current direction is shown in compass display ;(Y page 282). Floormat on the driver's side G WARNING Whenever you are using a floormat, make sure there is enough clearance and that the floormat is securely fastened. The floormat should always be securely fastened using the fastening equipment. Before driving off, check that the floormat is securely in place and adjust it if necessary. A loose floormat could slip and hinder proper functioning of the pedals. Do not place several floormats on top of each other as this may impair pedal movement. Slide the seat backwards. To install: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;. X Remove the floormat. X X Z 284 285 286 286 287 291 Maintenance and care Useful information ............................ ASSYST PLUS .................................... Engine compartment ........................ Care .................................................... 286 ASSYST PLUS Useful information Maintenance and care i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. Hiding a service message X Press the % or a button on the steering wheel. ASSYST PLUS Service messages The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Maintenance Booklet). You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 288). The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.: Next Service A in .. days Service A Due Service A Exceeded by .. days The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, shows the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Displaying service messages Switch on the ignition. Press the t or u button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the s or r button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the a button. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. X X Information about Service Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop. Have service work carried out as described in the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. Engine compartment Special service requirements Arduous operating conditions or increased loads on the vehicle will require some service work to be performed more often than for a vehicle in normal use. Such arduous conditions include regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops and use in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces. For example, if the vehicle is used under arduous operating conditions, have air filters, engine oil and oil filters changed frequently and check the wheels often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Engine compartment Hood Opening the hood G WARNING Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the hood could be forced open by passing air flow. This could cause the hood to come loose and injure you and/or others. G WARNING Do not open the hood when the engine is overheated. You could be seriously injured. Observe the coolant temperature gauge to determine whether the engine may be overheated. If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment, move away from the vehicle. Wait until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call the fire department. G WARNING There is a risk of injury if the hood is open, even if the engine is not running. Some engine components can become very hot. To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those components described in the Operator's Manual and observe the relevant safety notes. G WARNING To avoid injury, stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running. The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30seconds or may even restart after the engine has been switched off. For this reason, you must not reach into the fan rotation area. G WARNING The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high voltage, it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system: Rwith the engine running starting the engine Rwhen the ignition is switched on and the engine is turned manually Rwhile X Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off. G WARNING The windshield wipers and wiper linkage could be set in motion. When the hood is open, you or others could be injured by the wiper linkage. Make sure that the windshield wipers are switched off. Remove the SmartKey or make sure that no ignition position has been Z Maintenance and care You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. 287 Engine compartment 288 selected with KEYLESS-GO. All indicator lamps must be off in the instrument panel. the hood can no longer engage after an accident, for example. The hood could otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in motion and injure you and/or others. Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 inches (20 cm). X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. Maintenance and care X X Pull release lever : on the hood. The hood is released. ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood. Engine oil General notes on oil level Depending on the driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil over a distance of 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly: wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement. Rthe X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ; up and lift the hood. If you lift the hood approximately 15 inches (40 cm), the hood is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled struts. Closing the hood G WARNING When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone. Make sure the hood is securely engaged before driving off. Do not continue driving if Engine compartment Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick 289 Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service center. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after the interval for replacement specified by the service system has been exceeded Rusing engine oil additives. Park the vehicle on a level surface. To check the oil level with the engine at operating temperature, switch the engine off and wait for approximately five minutes. X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil. X Adding engine oil G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn yourself. Do not spill any engine oil on hot engine parts. H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the ! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too much oil has been added. This can lead to damage to the engine or the catalytic converter. Have excess oil siphoned off. Example: engine oil cap Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Add engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 289). X Further information on engine oil (Y page 355). Z Maintenance and care Rusing 290 Engine compartment Checking and adding other service products Checking the coolant level G WARNING In order to avoid any potentially serious burns: Maintenance and care Ruse extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system, or if the coolant temperature display indicates that the coolant is overheated. Rdo not remove the pressure cap on the coolant reservoir if the coolant temperature is above 158 ‡ (70 †). Allow the engine to cool down before removing the cap. The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure. Rusing a rag, slowly turn the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure. Rdo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 (Y page 141) in the ignition lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 142). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 158 ‡ (70 †). Slowly turn cap : half a turn counterclockwise and allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. X For further information on coolant, see (Y page 356). Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system/headlamp cleaning system G WARNING Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/ antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned. Care 291 If the brake fluid level is between MIN mark ; and MAX mark : on the brake fluid reservoir, it is correct. Care General notes To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. Add the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. X X The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system. Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 357). Brake fluid level ! If you notice that the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the MIN mark or less, check the brake system immediately for leaks. Also check the thickness of the brake linings. Contact a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the error. Only check the brake fluid level when the vehicle is stationary and on a level surface. Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle's doors or windows when cleaning the inside. Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle. Always lock away cleaning products and keep them out of reach of children. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. Rabrasive H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and Z Maintenance and care G WARNING 292 Care the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by MercedesBenz. Maintenance and care Exterior care Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. This could cause an accident. For this reason, you must drive particularly carefully after washing the vehicle until the brakes have dried. G WARNING The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, deactivate the HOLD function and DISTRONIC PLUS before the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash. ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts. ! Make sure that the automatic transmission is in position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle could be damaged if the transmission is in another position. ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed. Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off (the OFF button has been pressed). Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position 0. Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield. Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible. Power washers G WARNING Do not use power washers with circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, in particular the tires. You could otherwise damage the tires and cause an accident. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about Care Rtires Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rtrim Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. Relectrical Cleaning the wheels ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. Cleaning the paintwork Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. X ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by MercedesBenz. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used. If the dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the paintwork has become dull, then the paintwork should be cleaned. Use the cleaning product Paint Cleaner, which has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot. X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paintwork quickly and provisionally. Matte finish care If your vehicle has a clear matte finish, observe the following instructions in order to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect care. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish. ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine. Z Maintenance and care the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: 293 294 Care ! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect: RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials. RFrequent use of car washes. RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. Maintenance and care ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. i The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. i Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of recommended and approved Mercedes-Benz care products. Cleaning the windows X Cleaning the wiper blades G WARNING Before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, switch off the windshield wipers and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have gone out. The windshield wipers could otherwise move and injure you. ! Only fold the windshield wipers away from the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the hood. G WARNING Before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, switch off the windshield wipers and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have gone out. The windshield wipers could otherwise move and injure you. ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly. ! Only fold the windshield wipers away from the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the hood. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield. X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition. X Care 295 Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo. Or clean the exterior lighting with cleaning cloths. Cleaning the mirror turn signals ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals. X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo. Cleaning cloths may be used as well. X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the rear view camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera with a power washer. Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. Cleaning the exhaust pipes ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acidbased cleaning agents such as sanitary cleansers or wheel cleaners. Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust Z Maintenance and care cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses. Care 296 tail pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. X Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chrome care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. X Interior care Maintenance and care Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. Rabrasive Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth. X Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever X Cleaning genuine wood and trim elements ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. ! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces. If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING When cleaning the steering wheel boss and dashboard, do not use cockpit sprays or cleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaning agents containing solvents cause the surface to become porous, and as a result, plastic parts may break away and be thrown around the interior when an air bag is deployed, which may result in severe injuries. ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by MercedesBenz. Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Care Cleaning the seat covers genuine leather, artificial leather or Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can damage the cover. ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. Make sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. Only use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean Alcantara® covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †) or in direct sunlight. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. Cleaning the headliner and carpets X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or a cleaning agent recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Maintenance and care ! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean 297 i Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time. Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash, they may not be able to provide adequate protection. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts Z 298 299 300 300 301 306 310 311 314 Breakdown assistance Useful information ............................ Where will I find...? ........................... Flat tire .............................................. Battery (vehicle) ................................ Jump-starting .................................... Towing and tow-starting .................. Fuses .................................................. Where will I find...? 300 Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. Breakdown assistance i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Where will I find...? First-aid kit Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the first-aid kit is located either in an open stowage space or behind the cover on the left side. X Open the trunk lid. Example: first-aid kit behind the side trim panel To open the cover: turn rotary knob : in the direction of the arrow and fold down cover ;. X Remove the first-aid kit. X Example: first-aid kit in an open stowage space X Remove first-aid kit :. i Check the expiration date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace missing items. Vehicle tool kit The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the trunk floor. X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 264). : Vehicle tool kit tray ; Stowage well = Spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency spare wheel The vehicle tool kit contains: RFolding RFuse wheel chock allocation chart RJack ROne pair of gloves Flat tire wrench eye RTowing "Minispare" emergency spare wheel The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the trunk floor. X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 264). Apply the parking brake firmly. X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position. X X Move the selector lever to position P. X Switch off the engine. Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics have status 0, which is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 142). X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so. X Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. X Remove tool kit tray :. X Turn stowage tray ; counter-clockwise and remove it. X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel =. X For further information on changing a wheel and mounting the spare wheel, see (Y page 301). Flat tire Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel or MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) (Y page 301). i Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires. Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor. The maximum driving distance is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden. Breakdown assistance RLug 301 302 Flat tire In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon: RSpeed Breakdown assistance RRoad condition ROutside temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of an accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Rthe RESP® is intervening constantly. Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. i When changing or replacing one or all of the tires, note the label "MOExtended". Take note also of the size specified for the vehicle. Changing a wheel and mounting the spare wheel Preparing the vehicle When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). G WARNING The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Mounting an emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Radapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Rnever install more than one spare wheel or emergency spare wheel that differs in size. Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size briefly. not switch ESP® off. Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions as well as the tire type must be correct. Rdo i Vehicles without a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit at the factory. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, e.g. wheel chock, lug wrench or alignment bolt, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Prepare the vehicle as described (Y page 301). X Remove the following items (depending on the vehicle's equipment) from the stowage well under the trunk/cargo compartment floor: Remergency spare wheel Rfolding wheel chock X Flat tire Rlug wrench the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Rjack X 303 Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the vehicle tool kit (Y page 300). The folding wheel chock is an additional securing measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients X On downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. Raising the vehicle G WARNING Fold both plates upwards :. Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. X X If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. The following must be observed when raising the vehicle: Rto Securing the vehicle on level ground X On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of raise the vehicle, only use the vehiclespecific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake Z Breakdown assistance Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away Flat tire Breakdown assistance 304 and inserting wheel chocks. Never disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its loadbearing capacity due to the restricted height. Rmake sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 inches (3 cm). Rnever place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle. Rnever lie under the raised vehicle. Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Rnever open or close a door or the trunk lid when the vehicle is raised. Rmake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. The jacking points are located just behind the wheel housings of the front wheels and just in front of the wheel housings of the rear wheels (arrows). ! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged. X Position jack = at jacking point ;. Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point. X Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = sits completely on jacking point ; and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn crank ? until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. X Flat tire Removing a wheel X 305 ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt. Unscrew the wheel bolts. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in. X Remove the wheel. Mounting a new wheel Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 342). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. Be sure to use the original-length wheel bolts when refitting the original wheel after it has been repaired. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Place the emergency spare wheel on the wheel hub and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. Lowering the vehicle G WARNING Tire pressure that is too high or too low can lead to a blowout of the mounted emergency spare wheel/spare wheel, particularly when driving with a heavy load and increasing speed. There is a risk of accident. Check the tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and adjust it. When doing so, observe the specified tire pressure. Turn the crank of the jack counterclockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Z Breakdown assistance G WARNING Battery (vehicle) 306 All wheels mounted must be equipped with functioning sensors. The defective wheel should no longer be in the vehicle. Battery (vehicle) Important safety notes Breakdown assistance G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The tightening torque must be 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). Turn the jack back to its initial position and store it together with the rest of the tirechange tool kit in the trunk/cargo compartment. X Transport the defective wheel in the trunk/ cargo compartment. or X Depending on the size of the wheel, you may also be able to secure the defective wheel in the spare wheel well. In this case, you will have to remove the stowage well casing from the spare wheel well and stow it securely in the trunk/cargo compartment. X Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installing. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit and damage your vehicle's electronic system. This can disrupt driving safety systems such as ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). RIf ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lock during braking. This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and the braking distance may increase. There is a risk of accident. RIf ESP® malfunctions, the vehicle will not be stabilised if it starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion i USA only: when you are driving with the emergency spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure monitoring system when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery (vehicle) Keep children away. Observe this Operator's Manual. G WARNING Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death. Never lean over batteries while connecting. You might get injured. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking etc. G WARNING Do not place any metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit. Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident. Take care that you do not become statically charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or rubbing against textiles. For this reason, you also should not pull or push the battery over carpets or other synthetic materials. Never touch the battery first. First, touch the outside body of the vehicle in order to release any possible electrostatic charges. Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. The battery could explode if touched due to electrostatic charge or due to spark formation. H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries. Breakdown assistance Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear eye protection. 307 ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. ! You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that: Ryou switch off the engine and remove the SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESSGO, ensure that the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged. Ryou first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal Z 308 Battery (vehicle) Breakdown assistance clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. Rthe transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be installed securely during operation. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Have the battery charge level checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by MercedesBenz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information. i Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. i If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will have to: Rset the clock; see the separate operating instructions. On vehicles with COMAND and a navigation system, the clock is set automatically. Rreset the function for automatically folding the exterior mirrors in/out by 10 This function is only available in vehicles for Canada. folding the mirrors out once (Y page 104).10 Charging the battery G WARNING Never charge a battery still installed in the vehicle unless a battery charger unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in paint damage, corrosion or personal injury. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Charge the battery in accordance with the separate instructions for the battery charger. G WARNING There is a risk of acid burns during the charging process due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery during the charging process. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. ! Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery chargers allow the battery to be charged while still installed in the vehicle. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jumpstarting connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 310). Battery (vehicle) 309 Open the hood (Y page 287). X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 310). X Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Breakdown assistance X Z 310 Jump-starting Jump-starting Breakdown assistance G WARNING Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death. Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting. You might get injured. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc. Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury. Read all instructions before proceeding. G WARNING Non-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. ! Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel. Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. Rjump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: Rthe jumper cables are not damaged. parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cables are connected to the battery. Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running. X Apply the parking brake firmly. X Move the selector lever to position P. X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.). X Open the hood (Y page 287). Rbare Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device. X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery B first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes. X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive terminal ; and positive terminal =, each time beginning at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Towing and tow-starting Important safety notes G WARNING If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid towing bar if: Rthe engine is not running. is a brake system malfunction. Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply or the vehicle's electrical system. The power assistance for the steering and the brake force booster do not work when the engine is not running. You will need more Rthere Z 311 Breakdown assistance Towing and tow-starting Breakdown assistance 312 Towing and tow-starting force to steer and brake, you may have to depress the brake pedal with maximum force. Before towing away, make sure that the steering can be moved and is not locked. If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: G WARNING i Deactivate the automatic locking feature The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be towed. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported. Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position N Release the selector lever lock manually to move it out of position P (Y page 155). (Y page 82). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Installing/removing the towing eye Installing the towing eye X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 300). ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe may be hot. You could burn yourself if you touch the tail pipe. Be particularly careful when removing the rear cover. ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, The mountings for the removable towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear, under the covers. towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle. ! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock and shift the automatic transmission to N. Then, turn the SmartKey back to 0 and leave it in the ignition lock. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed. X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the direction of the arrow. Towing and tow-starting Removing the towing eye X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. Attach cover : to the bumper and press until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. X Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised Only possible on vehicles without 4MATIC. When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 311). ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 113). X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X When leaving the vehicle, take the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO key with you. X vehicle. Adapt your style of driving accordingly. Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 113). i When towing with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual to signal a change of direction. In this case, only the turn signals for the desired direction flash. When you reset the combination switch, the hazard warning lamps start flashing again. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. X Transporting the vehicle The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Move the selector lever to N. As soon as the vehicle is loaded: Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. X Move the selector lever to position P. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Secure the vehicle. X Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 311). G WARNING The power assistance for the steering and the brake force booster do not work when the engine is not running. You will then need much more effort to brake and steer the ! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. Z Breakdown assistance Take cover : off the opening. X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the stop and tighten it. X 313 314 Fuses concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed Breakdown assistance with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. If the vehicle has transmission damage or damage to the front or rear axle, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical system If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 310). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. Tow-starting (emergency starting) ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be started by tow-starting. This could otherwise damage the transmission. You can find information on "Jump-starting" at (Y page 310). The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Before changing a fuse Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158). X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 141). or X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 142). X Fuses All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: Important safety notes RFuse G WARNING Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and that have the correct fuse rating for the systems concerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge faulty fuses. Using fuses that have not been approved or attempting to repair or bridge faulty fuses could cause the fuse to be overloaded and result in a fire. Have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system box on the driver's side of the dashboard RFuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel RFuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel The fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment under the trunk floor (Y page 300). Dashboard fuse box ! Do not use a pointed object such as a screwdriver to open the cover in the Fuses seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. dashboard. You could damage the dashboard or the cover. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it 315 Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off. X Open the hood. X Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. X To open: take lines ; from the guides. X Open clamps :. X Remove the fuse box cover forwards. X To open: pull out cover : slightly at the bottom in the direction of arrow =. X Pull cover : outwards in the direction of arrow ; and remove it. X To close: clip in cover : on the front of the dashboard. X Fold cover : inwards until it engages. X Fuse box in the engine compartment G WARNING Make sure that the windshield wipers are switched off and that the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock before you open the cover of the fuse box. Otherwise, the windshield wipers and the wiper rods above the cover could be set in motion. This could lead to you or others being injured by the wiper rods. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the To close: check whether the rubber seal is lying correctly in the cover. X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box into the retainer. X Fold down cover and close clamps :. X Secure lines ; in the guides. X X Close the hood. Fuse box in the trunk ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. X Open the trunk lid. fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture Z Breakdown assistance is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. Fuses 316 X Breakdown assistance X To open: turn rotary catch : clockwise. Open cover ; downwards in the direction of the arrow. 317 318 318 318 320 322 329 333 334 335 339 342 343 Wheels and tires Useful information ............................ Important safety notes .................... Operation ........................................... Winter operation ............................... Tire pressure ..................................... Loading the vehicle .......................... Maximum load rating ....................... Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards .......................................... Tire labeling ....................................... Definition of terms for tires and loading ............................................... Changing a wheel ............................. Wheel and tire combinations ........... 318 Operation Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Important safety notes Wheels and tires G WARNING If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part (designation, manufacturer, model). G WARNING A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tires without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tire. replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tires with run-flat characteristics: Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations recommendations Information on the dimensions and types of wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found in the "Wheel/tire combinations" section (Y page 343). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Rfactory Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap Rin the "Tire pressure" section Pay special attention to the country-specific requirements for tire approval. These requirements can stipulate a specific tire type for your vehicle. Furthermore, the use of certain tire types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. You can find further information regarding tires at specialist tire retailers, at qualified specialist workshops or at any authorized MercedesBenz Center. i Further information on wheels and tires can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Rimmediately Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Operation Notes on driving RIf the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tire pressures and correct them if necessary. parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls, can get damaged. RWhen Operation G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. RRegularly check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, punctures, tears, bulges on tires and deformation or cracks or severe corrosion on wheels) at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. RRegularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 319). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems. RRegularly check the pressure of all the tires including the emergency spare wheel or the spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 322). Tire tread G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. Minimum tire tread depth for: RSummer RM+S tires: â in (3 mm) tires: ã in (4 mm) For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached. Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once the tread depth is approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced. Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread. Notes on selecting, mounting and replacing tires ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type and make. ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. RAfter mounting new tires, run them in at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles Z Wheels and tires Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires 319 320 Winter operation (100 km), as they only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tires which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel. The service life of tires depends on the following factors amongst other things: RDriving style pressure RDistance covered Wheels and tires RTire MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) allow you to continue driving your vehicle even if one or more tires are entirely deflated. MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found in the "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 301). braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. M+S tires G WARNING M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. G WARNING The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Mounting an emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Radapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Rnever install more than one spare wheel or emergency spare wheel that differs in size. Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size briefly. not switch ESP® off. Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions as well as the tire type must be correct. Rdo Winter operation Points to note Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 342). Driving with summer tires At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tires will allow driving Winter operation Check the tire pressures (Y page 325). Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 325). X Vehicles for USA: restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 326). X X After installing a spare wheel or an emergency spare wheel, do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). Snow chains G WARNING If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever install snow chains to the front wheels Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels. wheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps may otherwise be damaged. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: RSnow chains may not be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-tire combinations (Y page 343). ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to mount snow chains. RDo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). RSnow chains may not be mounted on the emergency spare wheel. i You may wish to deactivate ESP®(Y page 64) when pulling away with snow chains installed. This way you can allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). ! On some tire sizes there is not enough space for snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire combinations" section under "Tires and wheels". ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wish to mount snow chains on steel wheels, make sure that you remove the respective Z Wheels and tires safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted. When you have mounted M+S tires: 321 322 Tire pressure Tire pressure Tire pressure specifications G WARNING Tires with tire pressures that are too low or too high are associated with the following hazards: Wheels and tires Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is heavily laden or when driven at high speeds. Rthe tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly, which can severely impair tire traction. Rthe driving, steering and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. There is a risk of accident. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel: Rmonthly, at least Rif the load changes Rbefore beginning a long journey Runder different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tire pressure. The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. 1.) Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 329). The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed. i The specifications given on the following Tire and Loading Information placard are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressures applicable to your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on your vehicle. : Recommended tire pressures Option 2) Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. i Specifications shown in the examples of tire pressure tables are for illustration purposes only. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. Tire pressure specifications applicable to your vehicle are located in your vehicle's tire pressure table. Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted for this vehicle by the factory If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for that tire size. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ. Tire pressure 323 Option 3) The tire pressure for the emergency/collapsible spare wheel (depending on vehicle equipment) can be found: Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 336). in yellow on the rim of the emergency/collapsible spare wheel Rin the "Wheel and tire combinations" section (Y page 343) in this Operator's Manual Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Important notes on tire pressure G WARNING If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values: Rif you want to drive with an increased load and/or Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds. i The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort. If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. RCheck the tire for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. To test tire pressure, use a suitable tire pressure gauge. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion Z Wheels and tires Rprinted 324 Tire pressure about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitoring system, the tire pressure can be checked using the on-board computer. The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load. Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold. The tires are cold: Wheels and tires Rif the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ 1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires and only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the emergency/collapsible spare wheel (depending on vehicle equipment) Rin Underinflated or overinflated tires Underinflation G WARNING Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/ or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Underinflated tires may: Rwear quickly and unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption Roverheat, leading to tire defects an adverse effect on handling characteristics Rhave Overinflation G WARNING Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Overinflated tires may: Rhave an adverse effect on handling characteristics Rwear quickly and unevenly Rbe more susceptible to damage Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort Rincrease the braking distance Maximum tire pressures Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the Tire pressure recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 322). 325 If necessary, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value (Y page 322). X If the tire pressure is too high, release air by pressing down the metal pin in the valve using the tip of a pen, for example. Then, check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. X Repeat these steps for the other tires. X Tire pressure loss warning system (Canada only) pressure i The actual values for tires are vehicle- specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Checking the tire pressures Important safety notes Observe the "tire pressure information" section (Y page 322). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap Rin the "Tire pressure information" section Checking tire pressures manually To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows: Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked. X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. X Read the tire pressure and compare it with the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side of your vehicle. X Important safety notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display. The tire pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 322). The tire pressure loss warning system does not replace the need to regularly check your vehicle's tire pressures, since an even loss of pressure on several tires at the same time cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss warning system. The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers. The function of the tire pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are mounted to your vehicle's tires. Rroad conditions are wintry. Z Wheels and tires : Example: maximum permissible tire Tire pressure 326 Ryou If you wish to confirm the restart: Ryou X are driving on sand or gravel. adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof). Wheels and tires Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tire pressure Rchanged the wheels or tires Rmounted new wheels or tires X Before restarting, consult the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure the tire pressure in all four tires is set correctly for the current operating conditions. The tire pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. X Observe the notes in the section on tire pressures (Y page 322). Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 (Y page 141) in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. Pressure X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the a button. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes. Yes X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tire pressures of all four tires. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. or If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears, use the 9 or : button to select Cancel Cancel. X Press the a button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. X Tire pressure monitor Important safety notes It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation (Y page 322). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires (Y page 329). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops significantly. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 322). The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers. If a tire pressure monitor system is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors installed that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are installed to all wheels. The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA) or pressure loss (Canada). Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. RUSA only: if the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. G WARNING Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once a month when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. USA only: Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. i USA only: If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning, it may take more than ten Z 327 Wheels and tires Tire pressure 328 Tire pressure minutes for the tire pressure warning lamp to inform you of the malfunction by flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving. Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display. Wheels and tires i The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The tire pressures shown by the onboard computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. i The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. i USA only: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Checking tire pressure electronically Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 (Y page 141) in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service Settings menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. Pressure X Press button a. The current tire pressure for each wheel will be displayed in the multifunction display. X If the vehicle has been parked for over 20 minutes, the Tire pressures will be displayed after driving a few minutes message appears. After a teach-in period, the tire pressure monitor automatically recognizes new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure values to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active display message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored. i If a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel is mounted, the system may continue to show the tire pressure of the wheel that has been removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare tire is mounted is not the same as the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel's current tire pressure. Tire pressure monitor warning messages If the tire pressure monitor detects a significant pressure loss on one or more tires, Loading the vehicle i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are interchanged, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service Settings menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. Pressure X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure for the individual tires or the Tire pressures will be displayed after driving a few minutes message. X Press the : button. The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message appears in the multifunction display. X If you wish to confirm the restart: X Restarting the tire pressure monitor When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring system recognizes the new reference values automatically. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here: X Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 322). Additional tire pressure values for driving at high speeds or with heavy loads can be found in the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the a button. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Loading the vehicle Instruction labels for tires and loads G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. Z Wheels and tires a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds and the tire pressure warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Each tire that is affected by a significant loss of pressure is highlighted with a color. If the following message appears in the multifunction display: Correct Tire Pressure: X Check the tire pressure on all four wheels and correct it if necessary. 329 330 Loading the vehicle maximum permissible load that applies for your vehicle can be found on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard. Wheels and tires Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. X Specification for maximum permissible load : is listed on the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the specified value. Number of seats i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. : B-pillar, driver's side Maximum permissible load i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible load is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The Maximum number of seats : indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to Loading the vehicle 331 travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Determining the correct load limit Step-by-step instructions Wheels and tires The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Refer to this Operator's Manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle (Y page 333). Z 332 Loading the vehicle Example: steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 330). Step 1 Wheels and tires Step 2 Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 3 1 Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3 Front: 1 Rear: 2 Front: 1 Weight of the occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg) Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Gross weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) Maximum load rating Step 3 Permissible load and trailer load/ noseweight (maximum permissible load rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 1500 lbs (680 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) = 960 lbs (435 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg) 333 Vehicle identification plate Even if you have calculated the total load carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 329). Permissible gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight. Gross axle weight rating: the maximum permissible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. the trailer load/noseweight is included in the load along with occupants and luggage. The trailer load/noseweight is usually approximately 10% of the gross weight of the trailer and its load. Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their luggage. Mercedes-Benz does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Maximum load rating Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 329). Trailer load/noseweight The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, Z Wheels and tires The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage. Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 333). 334 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards i The actual values for tires are vehicle- specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Where applicable, the tire grading information can be found on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum tire width. For example: i The actual values for tires are vehicle- specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Treadwear Traction Temperature 200 AA A All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades. Wheels and tires Treadwear Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data. tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: tread wear :, tire traction ; and heat resistance =. All tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding quality class mark on the sidewall of the tire, even though these regulations do not apply to Canada. The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm, due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions. Traction G WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as measured under controlled conditions on Tire labeling represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Tire labeling Tire labeling overview The following markings are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name: ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train. Temperature G WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. These represent the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A : Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard (Y page 339) ; DOT, Tire Identification Number (Y page 338) = Maximum tire load (Y page 333) ? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 324) A Manufacturer B Tire material (Y page 339) C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed index (Y page 336) D Load index (Y page 338) E Tire name i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Z Wheels and tires specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point. Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of ã in (4 mm) for all four winter tires (Y page 320) to maintain normal driving characteristics in winter. Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with ice or snow. Take appropriate care when driving. 335 336 Tire labeling Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating : Tire width ; Nominal aspect ratio in % = Tire code Wheels and tires ? Rim diameter A Load bearing index B Speed rating i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description. If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "T" precedes the size description: these are compact emergency spare wheels at high tire pressure, to be used only temporarily in an emergency. Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire width in millimeters. Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height. Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires. Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 329). Example: Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 333). For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (Y page 338). Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. G WARNING Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and Tire labeling Summer tires (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed. Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) All-weather tires and winter tires T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) Index H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) Q M+S11 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) T M+S11 W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) H M+S11 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) V M+S11 ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). The service specification is made up of load-bearing index A and speed rating B. RIf the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). RThe size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph 11 Or Speed rating up to 118 mph (190 km/h) up to 149 mph (240 km/h) i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also have the i snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding snow traction, and were specially developed for driving on snow. An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding the following speeds: Rall vehicles (except AMG vehicles): 130 mph (210 km/h) RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h) RAMG vehicles with increased top speed: 174 mph (280 km/h) The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating for your vehicle as specified in the "tires" section (Y page 343), e.g. if you buy new tires. M+Si for winter tires. Z Wheels and tires adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. 337 338 Tire labeling Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Load index Wheels and tires i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. In addition to the load-bearing index, load index : may be imprinted after the letters that identify speed rating B(Y page 336) on the sidewall of the tire. RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire RLight Load: represents a light load tire RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every manufacturer of new tires or retreader has to imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced. The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN enables tire manufacturers to inform purchasers of recalls and other safetyrelevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and manufacturing date A. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol : indicates that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. For further information about retreaded tires, see (Y page 318). Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in 2008. Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire characteristics 339 Normal occupant weight The number of occupants for which the vehicle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards deviate from the data in the example. This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall : and under tire tread ;. Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire ply composition and material used Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. Bar Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of the United States Department of Transportation. Recommended tire pressure The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment This is the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted. Z Wheels and tires i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using U.S. government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. 340 Definition of terms for tires and loading GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating The speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved. Wheels and tires GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Maximum loaded vehicle weight The maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the total load limit and the weight of the optional equipment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely. Curb weight The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the airconditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum load rating The maximum load rating in kilograms or pounds is the maximum weight for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch) A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. Definition of terms for tires and loading Aspect ratio Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent. 341 optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a highperformance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. Tire pressure This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. TIN (Tire Identification Number) This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Tire pressure of cold tires Rif the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) Tread The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Bead The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim. Sidewall The part of the tire between the tread and the bead. Weight of optional extras The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These Load bearing index The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire. Traction Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. Treadwear indicators Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions. Total load limit Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. Z Wheels and tires The tires are cold: 342 Changing a wheel Changing a wheel Flat tire The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 301) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. It also provides instructions on changing a wheel or mounting the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel. Interchanging the wheels Wheels and tires G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notices in the section on "Changing a wheel and mounting the spare wheel" (Y page 302). The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center. If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be interchanged every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tire pressures. Information on changing tires and mounting the spare wheel (Y page 302). ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components. Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Direction of rotation Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is maintained. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation. You may mount a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limit specified on the spare wheel/ emergency spare wheel. Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately. Wheel and tire combinations General notes ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. RMO1 ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if you have no information about their previous usage. i The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard with the recommended tire pressures on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions (Y page 322). Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet. i Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle with: Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/right) Rthe same type of tires at a given time (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) i On the following pages, you can find information on approved wheel rims and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter tires. Winter tires are not available at the factory as standard equipment or optional extras. If you would like to equip your vehicle with approved winter tires, you may also, in certain circumstances, require rims of the appropriate size. The sizes of the approved winter tires may deviate from that of the standard tires. This is dependent on the model and the equipment installed at the factory. The tires and wheel rims, as well as further information, can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Wheels and tires Wheel and tire combinations 343 344 Wheel and tire combinations i Overview of abbreviations used in the following tire tables: RBA: both axles front axle RRA: rear axle RFA: In the following table, the wheel/tire combinations are assigned to the vehicle models through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.: V1 C 25012 V2 C 30012, C 300 4MATIC12 V3 C 35012, C 350 4MATIC12 V4 C 63 AMG Wheels and tires i Not all wheel and tire combinations are available at the factory for all countries. 12 BlueEFFICIENCY Wheel and tire combinations 345 Summer tires Alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 BA 225/45 R17 91 W MOExtended13, 14 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm) # # # — FA 225/45 R17 91 W MOExtended13 245/40 R17 91 W MOExtended13, 15 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm) 8.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 2.28 in (58 mm) # # # — FA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL # # # — RA 255/35 R18 94 Y XL15 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm) 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm) FA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL # # # — RA 255/35 R18 94 Y XL15 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm) 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm) FA 225/40 ZR18 92 Y XL # # # — RA 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL15 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm) 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm) FA 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL — — — # RA 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL15 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm) 9.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm) FA 235/35 ZR19 XL — — — # RA 255/30 ZR19 XL15 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm) 9.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm) RA 13 MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) only in conjunction with an activated tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor. in conjunction with sports suspension code 486, dynamic handling package code 483 and Sports package code 950/952. 15 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 14 Not Z Wheels and tires Tires 346 Wheel and tire combinations Wheels and tires All-weather tires Alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 BA 205/55 R16 91 H M+S16 7.0 J x 16 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) # — — — BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+S14 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm) # # — — FA 225/45 R17 91 H M+S # # # — RA 245/40 R17 91 H M+S15 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm) 8.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 2.28 in (58 mm) Winter tires Alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 BA 205/55 R16 91 H M+Si16 7.0 J x 16 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) # — — — BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm) # # # — BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+SiMOExtended13 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm) # # # — BA 225/40 R18 92 V XL M+Si 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm) — — — # BA 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si15 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm) — — — # FA 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si 255/35 R18 94 V XL M+Si15 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm) 9.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm) — — — # RA 16 C 300 4MATIC: not in conjunction with Sports package code 950/952. in conjunction with sports suspension code 486, dynamic handling package code 483 and Sports package code 950/952. 15 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 13 MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) only in conjunction with an activated tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor. 14 Not Wheel and tire combinations 347 "Minispare" emergency spare wheel15 Tires Wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 T 125/90 R16 98 M16 tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/ 61 psi) 3.5 B x 16 H2 Wheel offset: 0.79 in (20 mm) # — — — T 125/80 R17 99 M17 tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/ 61 psi) 3.5 B x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 0.79 in (20 mm) — # # — T 125/70 R18 99 M tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/ 61 psi) 3.5 B x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 0.79 in (20 mm) — — — # Wheels and tires i The specified tire pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel. 15 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 300 4MATIC: not in conjunction with Sports package code 950/952. 17 C 300 4MATIC: only in conjunction with Sports package code 950/952. 16 C Z 348 349 350 350 350 350 351 352 358 Technical data Useful information ............................ Information regarding technical data .................................................... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... Warranty ............................................ Identification plates ......................... Service products and filling capacities ..................................................... Vehicle data ...................................... 350 Warranty Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Information regarding technical data i The data stated here specifically refers to Technical data a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts G WARNING Driving safety may be impaired if nonapproved parts, tires and wheels or safetyrelevant accessories are used. This could lead to malfunctions in safetyrelevant systems, e.g. the brake system. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars sills Rseats Rcockpit Rinstrument cluster Rcenter console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Rdoor Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and fine-tuned for them. Only genuine MercedesBenz parts should therefore be used. More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (Y page 351) and the engine number (Y page 352) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts. Warranty Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Identification plates 351 Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty Systems Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty RState warranty enforcement laws (Lemon Laws) Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. REmission Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) Information booklet, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to arrange a replacement. It will be mailed to you. Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) ; VIN = Paint code i The data shown on the identification plate is example data. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's identification plate. VIN X Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Z Technical data i If you lose the Service and Warranty Service products and filling capacities 352 Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering : upwards. You will see VIN ;. X The VIN can also be found in the following locations: Rat the lower edge of the windshield (Y page 352) Ron the vehicle identification plate (Y page 351) For health reasons, you should prevent service fluids from coming into direct contact with your skin or clothing. If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner. Service products include the following: RFuels Engine number RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindshield washer fluid control system refrigerant Components and service products must be matched. You should therefore only use products that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at an authorized MercedesBenz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: Technical data RClimate : Emission control information plate, including the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards ; Engine number (stamped into the crankcase) = VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) Service products and filling capacities Important safety notes RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. RMB G WARNING Comply with all valid regulations with respect to handling, storing and disposing of service fluids. Otherwise, you could endanger persons or the environment. Keep service fluids out of the reach of children. Fuel Important safety notes G WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious personal injury. Service products and filling capacities Tank capacity Model All models Total capacity 17.4 US gal (66.0 l) Model Of which reserve All models (except C 63 AMG) Approx. 2.1 US gal (8.0 l) C 63 AMG Approx. 3.7 US gal (14.0 l) Gasoline Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage to the fuel system and engine. ! You should only refuel with unleaded premium-grade gasoline as this avoids damaging the catalytic converter. If engine running problems are apparent, have the cause checked immediately and repaired. Excess unburned fuel can otherwise enter the catalytic converter, leading to overheating and possibly causing a fire. ! To ensure the longevity and full performance of the engine, only premiumgrade unleaded gasoline may be used. If there is no premium-grade unleaded gasoline available and regular unleaded gasoline must be used, please observe the following precautions: Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible. Rdo not drive at the maximum speed. Ravoid sudden acceleration. Rif the vehicle is carrying a light load, e.g. two passengers without luggage, do not allow the engine to rev above 3000 rpm. Rif the vehicle is fully loaded or is being operated in mountainous terrain, do not depress the accelerator pedal further than Ô of the pedal travel. Only refuel using premium-grade unleaded gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 91. Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline with additives can be used. The concentration of additives in the fuel, however, must not exceed 10%, e.g.: REthanol RTAME RETBE RIPA RTBA For MTBE, the concentration should not exceed 15%. The concentration of methanol in gasoline, including other additives, must not exceed 3%. Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not permitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, may be used. Z Technical data Never allow sparks, flames or smoking materials near gasoline. Turn off the engine before refueling. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing contact. Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging to your health. 353 354 Service products and filling capacities All of these mix fuels must fulfill the fuel requirements, e.g.: Rknock resistance point Rvapor pressure You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance. Rboiling i For further information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). Information on refueling (Y page 156). Technical data Additives ! Do not refuel with low-grade fuel and do not use fuel additives that are not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Damage to or malfunctions of the fuel system may otherwise occur. One of the main problems of poor fuel quality is the forming of deposits that are created during the gasoline combustion process. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use branded fuels that have additives. If you use fuels without these additives over a longer period of time, carbon deposits may build up. These deposits form at the inlet valves and in the combustion chamber in particular. This could lead to engine problems, e.g.: Rlonger engine warm-up phase idle Rengine noise Rmisfiring Rloss of power Carbon deposits may form if the availability of gasoline with relevant additives is insufficient (in certain regions). In this case, Mercedes-Benz recommends additives approved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles; see http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Runeven For a list of approved products, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label. Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. This causes unnecessary costs and could damage the engine. Flexible fuel vehicles Important safety notes G WARNING E85 fuel (ethanol) and its vapours are poisonous, highly flammable and highly combustible. E85 fuel can cause serious injury if ignited, if you come into contact with it you or if you inhale fuel vapors. Avoid inhaling E85 fuel vapors and avoid skin contact with E85 fuel. Extinguish any naked flames before refueling. Keep sparks away from E85 fuel, and do not smoke. Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueled with the following fuel types: Rpremium-grade unleaded gasoline fuel Ra mixture of E85 fuel and premium-grade unleaded gasoline RE85 i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Fuel consumption The energy content of E85 fuel is less than that of the same amount of premium-grade gasoline. The amount of fuel consumed when operating the vehicle with E85 fuel is therefore higher than with premium-grade gasoline. Maintenance Inform your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center that you are operating or have operated the vehicle with E85 fuel. Service products and filling capacities Engine oil General notes ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a specification other than is necessary to fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. Otherwise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment. The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems. For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Missing values were not available at time of going to print. Model Engine model MB Approval C 250 271 BlueEFFICIENCY 229.3, 229.5, 229.51 C 300 4MATIC 272 BlueEFFICIENCY 229.5 C 300 276 BlueEFFICIENCY (Canada only) 229.3, 229.5 C 350 276 BlueEFFICIENCY C 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY (Canada only) C 63 AMG 156 229.5 Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils for AMG vehicles. i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers. Filling capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. Missing values were not available at time of going to print. Model Capacity C 250 BlueEFFICIENCY 5.8 US qt (5.5 l) C 300 BlueEFFICIENCY 6.9 US qt (6.5 l) (Canada only) C 300 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY 7.4 US qt (7.0 l) Z Technical data Low outside temperatures If the outside temperature is below 32 ‡ (0 †) the starting procedure can take noticeably longer when operating with E85 fuel. E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outside temperatures under -4 ‡ (-20 †). 355 356 Service products and filling capacities Model Capacity G WARNING C 350 BlueEFFICIENCY C 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY (Canada only) C 63 AMG With external oil cooler: 9.0 US qt(8.5 l) Additives ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Engine oil viscosity Technical data Brake fluid Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air; this lowers its boiling point. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when driving downhill). This would impair braking efficiency. You should have the brake fluid renewed at regular intervals. The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid renewed regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Coolant Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that it is thin. Select an engine oil with an SAE (viscosity) classification suitable for the prevailing outside temperatures. The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore strongly recommended that you carry out regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification. Important safety notes G WARNING Antifreeze is highly flammable. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling antifreeze. If antifreeze comes into contact with hot engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn yourself. Do not spill any antifreeze on hot engine parts. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at Service products and filling capacities ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Rcorrosion protection protection Rraising the boiling point If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266 ‡ (130 †). The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rantifreeze Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively. If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1. The coolant is checked with every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. Filling capacities Missing values were not available at time of going to print. Model Capacity C 250 BlueEFFICIENCY Approx. 7.6 US qt (7.2 l) C 300 BlueEFFICIENCY (Canada only) C 300 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Approx. 8.9 US qt (8.4 l) C 350 BlueEFFICIENCY C 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY (Canada only) C 63 AMG Approx. 12.4 US qt (11.7 l) Technical data http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. 357 i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze. Windshield/headlamp cleaning system Important safety notes G WARNING Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/ antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned. ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. ! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. Z Vehicle data 358 ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked. At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperature. X Technical data RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 2 parts water. RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 1 part water. RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB WinterFit to 1 part water. Vehicle data General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: - Tires - Load - Condition of the suspension - Optional equipment Rthe vehicle length specified includes the front license plate adapter. Dimensions and weights i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Filling capacities Model Model Capacity All models except C 300 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY 3.7 US qt (3.5 l) All models except C 300 BlueEFFICIENCY C 300 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY 6.3 US qt (6.0 l) C 300 BlueEFFICIENCY (Canada only) :Opening height 69.2 in (1757 mm) 69.3 in (1761 mm) Vehicle data Missing values were not available at time of going to print. All models (except AMG vehicles) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 79.1 in (2008 mm) Wheelbase 108.7 in (2760 mm) 35.6 ft (10.84 m) C 250 BlueEFFICIENCY C 350 BlueEFFICIENCY C 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY (Canada only) Vehicle length 182.3 in (4630 mm) Vehicle height 56.9 in (1444 mm) Maximum roof load Maximum trunk load C 63 AMG Vehicle length 181.0 in (4596 mm) Vehicle length 185.5 in (4712 mm) Vehicle height 56.9 in (1444 mm) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 79.1 in (2008 mm) Vehicle height 56.4 in (1433 mm) Wheelbase 108.9 in (2765 mm) Maximum roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Maximum trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Turning radius C 300 BlueEFFICIENCY (Canada only) Vehicle length 181.0 in (4596 mm) Vehicle height 57.0 in (1448 mm) Maximum roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Maximum trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg) 36.4 ft (11.10 m) Maximum roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Maximum trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg) C 300 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle length 182.3 in (4630 mm) Vehicle height 56.9 in (1444 mm) Maximum roof load Maximum trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Z Technical data Turning radius 359 360

Mercedes - C 200 - Owners Manual - 2013 - 2013

Get your hands on the complete Mercedes factory workshop software

Get notified when we add a new Mercedes200 Manual

We cover 60 Mercedes vehicles, were you looking for one of these?

Mercedes - SLK 230 - Workshop Manual - (2001)

Mercedes Benz Service Manual Library Model W201

Mercedes - 220 - Workshop Manual - 1994 - 1995

Mercedes Mercedes Sprinter Mercedes Sprinter 1995 2005 Workshop Manual Russian

Mercedes - CLK 320 - Workshop Manual - (1999)

Mercedes - Vito - Owners Manual - 1995 - 2002

Mercedes - 230 - Wiring Diagram - 1994 - 1994

Mercedes - 190 - Workshop Manual - (1986)

Mercedes - Auto - mercedes-benz-c-class-2015-kezelesi-utmutato-82147

Mercedes W124 ETM (Electrical Trobleshoot Manual) PDF

Mercedes - E 300 - Workshop Manual - 1998 - 1998

Mercedes - Vito - Owners Manual - (2007)

Mercedes Benz Werkstatt-Handbuch PKW-Typen ab 1968 Baureihe 108-113 Wartung, Einstellung und Montage

Mercedes - 560 SEC - Wiring Diagram - 1989 - 1989

Mercedes - E 320 Sedan - Workshop Manual - 1999 - 1999

Mercedes - Auto - mercedes-benz-s-class-2013-kezelesi-utmutato-82184

Mercedes Mercedes 190 Mercedes Benz 190_1981 1993_Workshop Manual All Models

Mercedes Mercedes Vito Mercedes Vito Workshop Manual Russian

Mercedes - Vito - Owners Manual - (2006)

Mercedes - Sprinter - Parts Catalogue - 2006 - 2006

ATSG Mercedes 722.1-722.2 Transaxle Service Manual PDF

Mercedes 722.3 and 722.4 Transmission Repair Manual

Mercedes Mercedes Vario Mercedes Vario 2006 Owners Manual Romanian

Mercedes - Viano - Owners Manual - (2005)

Mercedes - SL 280 - Owners Manual - 2011 - 2013

Mercedes Mercedes Vito Mercedes Vito 2005 Misc. Documents Wiring Diagram

Mercedes Mercedes Viano Mercedes Viano 2005 Misc Documents Wiring Diagram

Mercedes - 420 SEL - Wiring Diagram - 1986 - 1986

Mercedes - E 430 - Workshop Manual - 2010 - 2010

Mercedes - SL 500 - Workshop Manual - (1994)

Mercedes - Vario - Owners Manual - 1996 - 2013 (Romanian)

Mercedes - Viano - Owners Manual - (2006) (Romanian)

Mercedes - SL 380 - Owners Manual - 2012 - 2014

Mercedes Mercedes Citan Mercedes Citan 2015 Owners Manual

Mercedes 722.5 Transmission Repair Manual

Mercedes Mercedes 190 Mercedes 190 1985 1989 Workshop Manual

Mercedes - CL 500 - Workshop Manual - (2000)

Mercedes - 380 SEC - Wiring Diagram - 1982 - 1982

Mercedes - E 350 Sedan - Workshop Manual - 2010 - 2010

Mercedes - CLA 250 - Owners Manual - 2015 - 2015

Mercedes - 500SL - Workshop Manual - (1990)

Mercedes - 300E - Workshop Manual - (1990)

Barossa - Motorcycle - Barossa__Barossa_170_MAGNA_parts

Mercedes - S 500 - Workshop Manual - (1996)

Mercedes - Sprinter - Owners Manual - 2012 - 2012

Mercedes - E 350 - Owners Manual - 2014 - 2014

1974-1984--Mercedes Benz--240D--4 Cylinders 2.4L MFI Diesel SOHC--31226601

Mercedes - E 230 - Workshop Manual - 2017 - 2017

Yamaha - Motorcycle - Yamaha_2001_YZ250_N_LC

Mercedes - Vito - Brochure - 2011 - 2011

Mercedes - C220 - Workshop Manual - 1996 - 1996 (2)

Mercedes Mercedes 560 Mercedes 560 1986 1991 Workshop Manual

Mercedes Mercedes 220 Mercedes 220 Workshop Manual

Mercedes Mercedes SL 380 Mercedes SL 380 1981 1985 Workshop Manual

1974-1984--Mercedes Benz--230--4 Cylinders 2.3L 1BL SOHC--31331801

Mercedes - E 320 - Brochure - 2015 - 2015

Mercedes - Vito - Owners Manual - 1996 - 1998 (Russian)

Mercedes - Sprinter - Brochure - 2011 - 2011 (2)

Mercedes Mercedes 190 Mercedes 190 Workshop Manual Spanish

Mercedes Mercedes 190 Mercedes 190 1984 1988 Workshop Manual